ABB RELION 650 SERIES Technical Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 75 / 942

background image

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1

Keypad

AMU0600428 v17

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either
as menu shortcut or control buttons.

1MRK 506 382-UEN A

Section 5

Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Line distance protection REL650 2.2 IEC

69

Technical manual

«
...
73
74
75
76
77
...
»

Summary of Contents for RELION 650 SERIES

Page 1: ...RELION 650 SERIES Line distance protection REL650 Version 2 2 Technical manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...Document ID 1MRK 506 382 UEN Issued October 2017 Revision A Product version 2 2 1 Copyright 2017 ABB All rights reserved ...

Page 4: ...erms of such license This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes cryptographic software written developed by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com and Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be...

Page 5: ...product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons including but not limited to personal injuries or death shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be compl...

Page 6: ...nd concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive and with the product standards EN 60255 1 and EN 60255 27 for the low voltage directive The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of ...

Page 7: ... 42 Control and monitoring functions 43 Communication 46 Basic IED functions 48 Section 3 Analog inputs 51 Introduction 51 Function block 51 Signals 52 Settings 53 Monitored data 58 Operation principle 59 Technical data 60 Section 4 Binary input and output modules 61 Binary input 61 Binary input debounce filter 61 Oscillation filter 61 Settings 61 Setting parameters for binary input modules 62 Set...

Page 8: ...ion alternatives 76 Functionality 76 Status LEDs 76 Indication LEDs 76 Function keys 85 Functionality 85 Operation principle 85 Section 6 Impedance protection 87 Distance protection ZMFPDIS 87 Identification 87 Functionality 87 Function block 88 Signals 89 Settings 91 Monitored data 92 Operation principle 93 Filtering 94 Distance measuring zones 94 Phase selection element 95 Directional criteria 9...

Page 9: ...logic ZCVPSOF 130 Identification 130 Functionality 131 Function block 131 Signals 131 Settings 132 Monitored data 132 Operation principle 133 Technical data 134 Out of step protection OOSPPAM 135 Identification 135 Functionality 135 Function block 136 Signals 136 Settings 137 Monitored data 138 Operation principle 138 Lens characteristic 141 Detecting an out of step condition 143 Maximum slip freq...

Page 10: ...ection four steps OC4PTOC 162 Identification 162 Functionality 162 Function block 163 Signals 164 Settings 165 Monitored data 171 Operation principle 171 Technical data 178 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 179 Identification 179 Functionality 179 Function block 179 Signals 179 Settings 180 Monitored data 180 Operation principle 180 Technical data 181 Directional residual overcu...

Page 11: ...als 205 Settings 206 Monitored data 211 Operation principle 211 Operating quantity within the function 211 Internal polarizing facility of the function 212 External polarizing for negative sequence function 213 Internal negative sequence protection structure 213 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages 213 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function 214 Technic...

Page 12: ...7 Monitored data 247 Operation principle 247 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker 250 Unsymmetrical current detection 250 Technical data 251 Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC 251 Identification 251 Functionality 251 Function block 251 Signals 252 Settings 252 Monitored data 253 Operation principle 254 Measured quantities 254 Base quantities 254 Overcurrent protection...

Page 13: ...ion principle 277 Measurement principle 278 Time delay 278 Blocking 284 Design 284 Technical data 285 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 286 Identification 286 Functionality 286 Function block 287 Signals 287 Settings 288 Monitored data 289 Operation principle 290 Measurement principle 290 Time delay 290 Blocking 295 Design 295 Technical data 296 Section 9 Frequency protection 299 U...

Page 14: ...hnical data 309 Rate of change of frequency protection SAPFRC 309 Identification 309 Functionality 309 Function block 310 Signals 310 Settings 310 Operation principle 311 Measurement principle 311 Time delay 311 Blocking 312 Design 312 Technical data 313 Section 10 Secondary system supervision 315 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC 315 Identification 315 Functionality 315 Function block 315 Signa...

Page 15: ...ored data 339 Operation principle 339 Basic functionality 339 Logic diagrams 340 Technical data 352 Autorecloser for 1 phase 2 phase and or 3 phase operation SMBRREC 353 Identification 353 Functionality 353 Function block 354 Signals 354 Settings 356 Operation principle 358 Terminology explanation 358 Status descriptions 358 Description of the status transition 359 Functional sequence description ...

Page 16: ...tings 395 Operation principle 395 Interaction with switch on process bus 402 Circuit breaker SXCBR 403 Functionality 403 Function block 404 Signals 404 Settings 405 Operation principle 405 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY 410 Functionality 410 Function block 410 Signals 410 Settings 412 Operation principle 412 Position supervision 412 Command response evaluation 412 Logic...

Page 17: ...principle 423 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC 424 Identification 424 Functionality 424 Function block 424 Signals 425 Settings 425 Operation principle 426 AutomationBits command function for DNP3 0 AUTOBITS 426 Identification 426 Functionality 426 Function block 427 Signals 427 Settings 428 Operation principle 429 Single command 16 signals SINGLECMD 429 Identification 429 Functiona...

Page 18: ...ction 3 phase ZCRWPSCH 441 Identification 441 Functionality 441 Function block 442 Signals 442 Settings 443 Operation principle 443 Current reversal logic 443 Weak end infeed logic 444 Technical data 446 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 446 Identification 446 Functionality 446 Function block 446 Signals 447 Settings 447 Operation principle 448 Zone extension 448 Loss of Load acceleration 448 Sche...

Page 19: ... Section 13 Logic 463 Tripping logic SMPPTRC 463 Identification 463 Functionality 463 Function block 464 Signals 464 Settings 465 Operation principle 466 Logic diagram 470 Technical data 472 General start matrix block SMAGAPC 473 Identification 473 Functionality 473 Function block 473 Signals 473 Settings 474 Operation principle 474 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC 480 Identification 480 Functionality 48...

Page 20: ...0 Settings 490 Operation principle 490 Technical data 491 Basic configurable logic blocks 491 AND function block AND 492 Function block 492 Signals 493 Technical data 493 Controllable gate function block GATE 493 Function block 493 Signals 493 Settings 494 Technical data 494 Inverter function block INV 494 Function block 494 Signals 494 Technical data 495 Loop delay function block LLD 495 Function...

Page 21: ...501 Signals 501 Settings 502 Technical data 502 Exclusive OR function block XOR 502 Function block 502 Signals 503 Technical data 503 Fixed signals FXDSIGN 503 Identification 503 Functionality 503 Function block 504 Signals 504 Settings 504 Operation principle 504 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I 505 Identification 505 Functionality 505 Function block 505 Signals 506 Monitored data 506 Settin...

Page 22: ...ion 514 Functionality 514 Function block 515 Signals 515 Settings 516 Operation principle 516 Technical data 517 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC 517 Identification 517 Functionality 517 Function block 518 Signals 518 Settings 519 Operation principle 519 Operation accuracy 521 Memory storage 521 Technical data 521 Comparator for integer inputs INTCO...

Page 23: ... 556 Phase current measurement CMMXU 561 Phase phase and phase neutral voltage measurements VMMXU VNMMXU 562 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI CMSQI 562 Technical data 562 Gas medium supervision SSIMG 564 Identification 564 Functionality 564 Function block 565 Signals 565 Settings 566 Monitored data 566 Operation principle 566 Technical data 567 Liquid medium supervision SSIML 568 Id...

Page 24: ... gas pressure indication 584 Technical data 584 Event function EVENT 585 Identification 585 Functionality 585 Function block 586 Signals 586 Settings 587 Operation principle 589 Disturbance report DRPRDRE 590 Identification 590 Functionality 590 Function block 591 Signals 593 Settings 595 Monitored data 605 Operation principle 609 Technical data 617 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP 618 Iden...

Page 25: ...631 Limit counter L4UFCNT 631 Identification 631 Identification 631 Functionality 631 Operation principle 631 Design 632 Reporting 633 Function block 633 Signals 633 Settings 634 Monitored data 634 Technical data 635 Running hour meter TEILGAPC 635 Identification 635 Functionality 635 Function block 636 Signals 636 Settings 637 Operation principle 637 Operation accuracy 638 Memory storage 639 Tech...

Page 26: ...oduction 655 Settings 655 Access point diagnostics 657 Functionality 657 Function block 658 Signals 658 Monitored data 659 Redundant communication 659 Identification 659 Functionality 660 Operation principle 660 Merging unit 662 Introduction 662 Settings 663 Monitored data 663 Routes 668 Introduction 668 Settings 669 Monitored data 669 Section 17 Station communication 671 Communication protocols 6...

Page 27: ...78 Operation principle 679 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV 679 Identification 679 Functionality 679 Function block 679 Signals 679 Settings 680 Operation principle 680 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 681 Identification 681 Functionality 681 Function block 681 Signals 682 Settings 682 Operation principle 682 GOOSE function block to receiv...

Page 28: ...nciple 694 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device GOOSEXLNRCV 695 Identification 695 Functionality 695 Function block 696 Signals 696 Settings 698 Operation principle 698 IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE communication protocol 698 Introduction 698 Function block 698 Signals 699 Output signals 699 Settings 700 Monitored data 700 Operation principle 705 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP 709 Technica...

Page 29: ... 741 Settings 741 Function status auto recloser for IEC 60870 5 103 I103AR 742 Functionality 742 Identification 742 Function block 742 Signals 742 Settings 742 Function status earth fault for IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF 743 Functionality 743 Identification 743 Function block 743 Signals 743 Settings 743 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 744 Functionality 744 Identificatio...

Page 30: ...2 Signals 753 Settings 753 IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IEDCMD 753 Functionality 753 Identification 753 Function block 754 Signals 754 Settings 754 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRCMD 754 Functionality 754 Identification 755 Function block 755 Signals 755 Settings 756 Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 I103GENCMD 756 Functionality 756 Identification 756...

Page 31: ...ngs 774 Operation principle 774 Security events on protocols SECALARM 775 Security alarm SECALARM 775 Signals 775 Settings 775 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG 775 Activity logging ACTIVLOG 775 Settings 776 Section 18 Security 777 Authority check ATHCHCK 777 Identification 777 Functionality 777 Operation principle 778 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED 780 Authority mana...

Page 32: ...y 790 Function block 791 Signals 791 Operation principle 791 Denial of service DOS 792 Functionality 792 Operation principle 792 Section 19 Basic IED functions 795 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN 795 Functionality 795 Settings 795 Operation principle 801 General concepts 801 Real time clock RTC operation 804 Synchronization alternatives 805 Process bus IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE synchronization 808 Pre...

Page 33: ...rix for binary outputs SMBO 819 Functionality 819 Function block 819 Signals 819 Operation principle 820 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI 820 Functionality 820 Function block 820 Signals 821 Settings 822 Operation principle 824 Frequency values 825 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM 826 Functionality 826 Function block 826 Signals 826 Settings 827 Operation principle 828 Global base values GBASVAL...

Page 34: ...former input module TRM 836 Introduction 836 Design 837 Technical data 838 Analog digital conversion module ADM 838 Introduction 838 Design 839 Binary input module BIM 841 Introduction 841 Design 841 Signals 844 Settings 845 Monitored data 845 Technical data 846 Binary output modules BOM 846 Introduction 846 Design 847 Signals 848 Settings 849 Monitored data 849 Technical data 853 Binary input out...

Page 35: ... 871 Flush mounting 871 Overview 871 Mounting procedure for flush mounting 872 19 panel rack mounting 872 Overview 872 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting 873 Wall mounting 874 Overview 874 Mounting procedure for wall mounting 875 How to reach the rear side of the IED 875 Side by side 19 rack mounting 876 Overview 876 Mounting procedure for side by side rack mounting 877 IED mounted with...

Page 36: ...85 Section 22 Connection diagrams 887 Section 23 Inverse time characteristics 889 Application 889 Principle of operation 892 Mode of operation 892 Inverse characteristics 897 Section 24 Glossary 925 Table of contents 30 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 37: ... for functions which measure an analogue signal which do not have corresponding primary quantity the 1 1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs on the IED Example of such functions are HZPDIF ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ 4 Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT primary current 5 Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary phase ...

Page 38: ...n 1 3 1 Product documentation set GUID 3AA69EA6 F1D8 47C6 A8E6 562F29C67172 v15 IEC07000220 4 en vsd Planning purchase Engineering Installing Commissioning Operation Maintenance Decommissioning Deinstalling disposal Application manual Operation manual Installation manual Engineering manual Communication protocol manual Cyber security deployment guideline Technical manual Commissioning manual IEC07...

Page 39: ...w to identify disturbances and how to view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per function The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function can be used The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings The technical ma...

Page 40: ... UEN Communication protocol manual DNP3 1MRK 511 413 UUS Communication protocol manual IEC 60870 5 103 1MRK 511 416 UEN Communication protocol manual IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 414 UEN Communication protocol manual IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 415 UEN Communication protocol manual LON 1MRK 511 417 UEN Communication protocol manual SPA 1MRK 511 418 UEN Point list manual DNP3 1MRK 511 419 UUS Acce...

Page 41: ...ning related to the concept discussed in the text It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions The tip icon indicates advice on for example how to design your project or how to use a certain function Although warning hazards are related to personal ...

Page 42: ...cted to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application configuration Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST ECT or LHMI If an internal signal path cannot be drawn wit...

Page 43: ...2PHAR GF2PTOV GF2PTUC GF2PTUV GF2PVOC PH1PTRC CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC EF4PTRC EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF INDCALH INDCALH INDCALH ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0 LDLP...

Page 44: ...RSV QCRSV RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCILO SCILO SCILO SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR...

Page 45: ...LLN0 PH1PTRC UV2PTUV PH1PTRC UV2PTUV VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU PSFPDIS PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 1 Introduction Line distance protection REL650 2 ...

Page 46: ...40 ...

Page 47: ... 0 3 option quantities 3 A03 optional function included in packages A03 refer to ordering details IEC 61850 or function name ANSI Function description Line Distance REL650 A11 REL650 A12 Impedance protection ZMFPDIS 21 Distance protection quad and mho characteristic 1 1 PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 1 ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 1 1 PSLPSCH Power swing logic 1 1 OOSPPAM 78 Out of step protec...

Page 48: ...rrent and power protection 1 LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection one time constant Celsius 1 1 LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection one time constant Fahrenheit 1 1 CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 1 1 CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 1 1 VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 1 Voltage protection UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 1 1 OV2PTOV 59 Two step ove...

Page 49: ...on 8 signals 5 5 AUTOBITS Automation bits command function for DNP3 0 3 3 SINGLECMD Single command 16 signals 4 4 I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870 5 103 50 50 I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 50 50 I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870 5 503 50 50 I103IEDCMD IED commands fo...

Page 50: ...mit transgression and overflow supervision 12 12 INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30 30 REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30 30 Table 3 Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances AND 280 GATE 40 INV 420 LLD 40 OR 298 PULSETIMER 40 RSMEMORY 40 SRMEMORY 40 TIMERSET 60 XOR 40 IEC 61850 or function name ANSI Function de...

Page 51: ... Logical signal status report 3 3 RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870 5 103 3 3 I103AR Function status auto recloser for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 I103EF Function status earth fault for IEC 60870 5 103 1 1 I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870 5 10...

Page 52: ...4TCP DNP3 0 for TCP IP communication protocol 1 1 DNPFREC DNP3 0 fault records for TCP IP and EIA 485 communication protocol 1 1 IEC 61850 8 1 IEC 61850 1 1 GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59 59 GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64 64 GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 3...

Page 53: ...24 1 P24 PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front Ethernet port 1 1 SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non redundant Ethernet port 4 4 RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 2 2 DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1 1 QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 32 32 Scheme communication ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta b...

Page 54: ...ge lock function SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs SMAI1 SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase ATHSTAT Authority status ATHCHCK Authority check AUTHMAN Authority management FTPACCS FTP access with password GBASVAL Global base values for settings ALTMS Time master supervision ALTIM Time management COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic...

Page 55: ...in PCM600 LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15 GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15 GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15 Basic part for CP HW LED indication module 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 2 Available functions Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 49 Technical manual ...

Page 56: ...50 ...

Page 57: ...alog channel s phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog channel s phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment that are sampled by Merging unit...

Page 58: ...oltage input 11 CH12 U STRING Analogue voltage input 12 PID 3924 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 7 TRM_9I_3U Output signals Name Type Description STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status CH1 I STRING Analogue current input 1 CH2 I STRING Analogue current input 2 CH3 I STRING Analogue current input 3 CH4 I STRING Analogue current input 4 CH5 I STRING Analogue current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analogue current...

Page 59: ...t 4 CH5 I STRING Analogue current input 5 CH6 I STRING Analogue current input 6 CH7 I STRING Analogue current input 7 CH8 I STRING Analogue current input 8 CH9 I STRING Analogue current input 9 CH10 I STRING Analogue current input 10 CH11 U STRING Analogue voltage input 11 CH12 U STRING Analogue voltage input 12 3 4 Settings SEMOD129840 4 v2 Dependent on ordered IED type 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section...

Page 60: ...L2U MU3 L3U MU3 L4U MU4 L1I L4I MU4 L1U L4U MU5 L1I L4I MU5 L1U L4U MU6 L1I L4I MU7 L1I L4I MU7 L1U L4U MU8 L1I L4I MU8 L1U L4U MU9 L1I L4I MU9 L1U L4U MU10 L1I L4I MU10 L1U L4U MU11 L1I L4I MU11 L1U L4U MU12 L1I L4I MU12 L1U L4U TRM40 Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle presentation GUID 72A8BEE0 2430 4C94 A1E0 9B6A0D149FE2 v1 All the visible parameter selections that are visible are not suppor...

Page 61: ...A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint7 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec7 1 10 A 1 1 Rate...

Page 62: ...sec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec6 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim6 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint7 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec7 1 10 ...

Page 63: ...ject the opposite CTsec4 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim4 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint5 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite CTsec5 1 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current CTprim5 1 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current CTStarPoint6 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the o...

Page 64: ...OREDDATA v3 Table 13 AISVBAS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Status INTEGER 0 Ok 1 Error 2 AngRefLow 3 Uncorrelated Service value status PID 3923 MONITOREDDATA v6 Table 14 TRM_7I_5U Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Analogue input module status PID 3924 MONITOREDDATA v6 Table 15 TRM_9I_3U Monitored data Name Type Values Range ...

Page 65: ...tion for directional functions Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object e g P Q I Reverse Forward Definition of direction for directional functions e g P Q I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is ToObject Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is FromObject en05000456 vsd IEC05000456 V1 EN US Figure 2 Inte...

Page 66: ...stand 250 Ir one half wave Burden 20 mVA at Ir 1 A 150 mVA at Ir 5 A max 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included Voltage inputs Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V Operating range 0 340 V Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s 420 V continuously Burden 20 mVA at 110 V 80 mVA at 220 V all values for individual voltage inputs Note All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated fr...

Page 67: ...when the signal goes down to 0 again 4 1 2 Oscillation filter GUID 41B89E6F 50C3 44BF 9171 3CC82EB5CA15 v4 Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for example nearby breakers An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state cha...

Page 68: ...ion release limit 4 1 3 2 Setting parameters for binary input output module PID 4050 SETTINGS v2 Table 20 IOMIN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On On Binary input output module in operation On or not Off DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 ...

Page 69: ...IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Local HMI signals LHMICTRL 5 2 2 Function block GUID A8AC51E9 5BD7 4A80 9576 4816F14DD08D v2 LHMICTRL CLRLEDS HMI ON RED S YELLOW S YELLOW F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD IEC09000320 1 en vsd IEC09000320 V1 EN US Figure 3 LHMICTRL function block 5 2 3 Signals PID 3992 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 21 LHMICTRL Input signals Name Type Defau...

Page 70: ... Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN Basic part for LED indication HW module GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15 GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15 GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15 5 3 2 Function block GUID BDB5797F F27E 4FEE 9FDB 1C9E2F572BB6 v3 LEDGEN BLOCK RESET NEWIND ACK IEC09000321 1 en vsd IEC09000321 V1 EN US Figure 4 LEDG...

Page 71: ...P1_LED1 Input signals Name Type Default Description HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1 local HMI alarm group 1 HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1 local HMI alarm group 1 HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1 local HMI alarm group 1 5 3 4 Settings PID 4114 SETTINGS v6 Table 26 LEDGEN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On On Ope...

Page 72: ...ol module GUID EECAE7FA 7078 472C A429 F7607DB884EB v2 5 4 1 Identification GUID E6611022 5EA3 420D ADCD 9D1E7604EFEB v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number LCD part for HMI Function Keys Control module FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 5 4 2 Function block GUID A803A728 5CFC 4606 98E4 793E873B99D4 v3 FNKEYMD1 LEDCTL1 FKEYOUT1 IEC09000327 V1 EN US F...

Page 73: ...DFn1 LabelOn 0 18 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state LabelOff 0 18 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state PID 6452 SETTINGS v2 Table 31 FNKEYTY1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type Off Menu shortcut Control Off Function key type MenuShortcut 0 Menu shortcut for function key GUID BCE87D54 C836 40EE 8DA7 779B767059AB v1 MenuShortcut values are product depend...

Page 74: ... V3 EN US Figure 7 Local human machine interface The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements Keypad Display LCD LED indicators Communication port for PCM600 Section 5 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 68 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 75: ...nus The push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms reset indications provide help and switch between local and remote control mode The keypad also contains programmable push buttons that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 69 Technical manual ...

Page 76: ...l navigation and command push buttons and RJ 45 communication port 1 5 Function button 6 Close 7 Open 8 Escape 9 Left 10 Down 11 Up 12 Right 13 Key 14 Enter 15 Remote Local 16 Uplink LED 17 Not in use 18 Multipage 19 Menu Section 5 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Local Human Machine Interface LHMI 70 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 77: ...onochrome liquid crystal display LCD with a resolution of 320 x 240 pixels The character size can vary The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends on the character size and the view that is shown The display view is divided into four basic areas 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 71 Technical manual ...

Page 78: ...ontent The status area shows the current IED time the user that is currently logged in and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600 If text pictures or other items do not fit in the display a vertical scroll bar appears on the right The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display horizontally Truncation is indicated w...

Page 79: ...nce The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function button control action The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 73 Technical manua...

Page 80: ...ED panel The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time Each panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on the label string length 5 5 1 3 LEDs AMU0600427 v13 The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display Ready Start and...

Page 81: ...ssing that button cycles through the three pages A lit or un acknowledged LED is indicated with a highlight Such lines can be selected by using the Up Down arrow buttons Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop ups as well as from the LED panel as such The Multipage button has a LED This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel ...

Page 82: ...on that presents the healthy status of the IED The yellow and red LEDs are user configured The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is triggered steady or that the IED is in test mode flashing The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs Green LED unlit no power blinking startup or abnormal situation IED is not in ser...

Page 83: ...t has elapsed In sequence 6 the restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of any new event all previous indications will be reset This facilitates that only the LED indications related to the latest event is shown Acknowledgment reset GUID E6727E8F C28B 4295 AE21 BC5643363805 v3 From local HMI The active LED indications can be acknowledged reset manually Manual acknowledgment and manual ...

Page 84: ...cknowledgement are only working in collecting Coll mode Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re starting Reset mode The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S Steady and F Flash At the activation of the input signal to any LED the indication on the corresponding LED obtains a color that corre...

Page 85: ...v2 This sequence is the same as Sequence 1 Follow S but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light Sequence 3 LatchedAck F S SEMOD56072 50 v2 This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation At the activation of the input signal the indication starts flashing After acknowledgment the indication disappears if th...

Page 86: ...signal RED LED Acknow IEC09000313_1_en vsd Activating signal GREEN R R G IEC09000313 V1 EN US Figure 18 Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck F S 2 colors involved GUID A652A49D F016 472D 8D38 6D3E75DAB1DB v3 If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications which are not visible ...

Page 87: ...ctivation of the input signal the indication will light up with a steady light The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation IEC01000235_2_e...

Page 88: ... S Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset that is immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072 86 v4 Figure 23 show...

Page 89: ... shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed IEC01000240_2_en vsd Activating signal 2 LED 2 Manual reset Activating signal 1 Automatic reset LED 1 Disturbance tRestart Disturbance tRestart IEC01000240 V2 EN US Figure 24 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S two different disturbances 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 5 Local Human Machine Interface LHMI Line distance prote...

Page 90: ...g sequence 6 LatchedReset S two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for manual reset IEC01000242_2_en vsd Activating signal 2 LED 2 Manual reset Activating signal 1 Automatic reset LED 1 Disturbance tRestart IEC01000242 V2 EN US Figure 26 Operating sequence 6 LatchedReset S manual reset Section 5 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Loca...

Page 91: ...y outputs can in turn be used to control other function blocks for example switch control blocks binary I O outputs etc FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that control the behavior of the function block These settings and parameters are normally set using the PST Operating sequence GUID 84CA7C61 4F83 4F86 A07F BF9EC4E309BF v5 The operation mode is set ind...

Page 92: ...0ms 500ms pulse time pulse time pulse time 500ms IEC09000332_2_en vsd Input value Output value IEC09000332 V2 EN US Figure 29 Sequence diagram for setting PULSED Input function GUID 8EA4AE21 7A74 403A 84AE D5CEF9292A63 v2 All function keys work the same way When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is of type CONTROL then the corresponding input on this function block becomes a...

Page 93: ...ional mode Zone1 and zone2 are designed to measure in forward direction only while one zone ZRV is designed to measure in the reverse direction This makes them suitable together with a communication scheme for protection of power lines and cables in complex network configurations such as parallel lines multi terminal lines and so on A built in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreac...

Page 94: ...TRZ2 BLKTRZ3 BLKTRZ4 BLKTRZ5 BLKTRZRV EXTNST RELCNDZ1 RELCNDZ2 RELCNDZ3 RELCNDZ4 RELCNDZ5 RELCNDZRV TRIP TRZ1 TRL1Z1 TRL2Z1 TRL3Z1 TRZ2 TRL1Z2 TRL2Z2 TRL3Z2 TRZ3 TRZ4 TRZ5 TRZRV START STZ1 STNDZ1 STZ2 STL1Z2 STL2Z2 STL3Z2 STNDZ2 STZ3 STNDZ3 STZ4 STNDZ4 STZ5 STNDZ5 STZRV STL1ZRV STL2ZRV STL3ZRV STNDZRV STND STNDL1 STNDL2 STNDL3 STNDPE STFWL1 STFWL2 STFWL3 STFWPE STRVL1 STRVL2 STRVL3 STRVPE STFW1PH ...

Page 95: ... Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and trip outputs BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and trip outputs BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and trip outputs EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start of zone timers RELCNDZ1 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 1 RELCNDZ2 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 2 RELCNDZ3 INTEGER 127 Relea...

Page 96: ...rection STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 forward direction STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 forward direction STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 forward direction STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 any direction STZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 zone direction STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 any dire...

Page 97: ... reverse direction STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected reverse direction STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single phase fault detected forward direction STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two phase fault detected forward direction STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three phase fault detected forward direction STPE BOOLEAN Ph E zone measurement enabled any direction STPP BOOLEAN Ph Ph zone measurement enabled any direction 6 1 5 Settings...

Page 98: ...ction Direction in phase L1 L2Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in phase L2 L3Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in phase L3 L1L2Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in loop L1L2 L2L3Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in loop L2L3 L3L1Dir INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction in loop L3L1 L1R REAL...

Page 99: ...G REAL Ohm ZL12 Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value ZL12ANGIM REAL deg ZL12 Angle magnitude of instantaneous value ZL23IMAG REAL Ohm ZL23 Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value ZL23ANGIM REAL deg ZL23 Angle magnitude of instantaneous value ZL31IMAG REAL Ohm ZL31 Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value ZL31ANGIM REAL deg ZL31 Angle magnitude of instantaneous value 6 1 7 Operation prin...

Page 100: ...hase to phase faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel Figure 31 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance zones IEC05000458 2 en vsd L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 L1 N L2 N L3 N L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1 Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 L1 N L2 N L3...

Page 101: ...D D55104B2C9B4 v5 The operation of the phase selection element is primarily based on current change criteria i e delta quantities with significantly increased dependability To handle this there is also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage and current phasors This continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and ca...

Page 102: ...e directional decision The basis is provided by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase currents For extra security especially in making a very fast decision this method is complemented with an equivalent comparison where instead of the phase current the change in phase current is used Moreover a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a re...

Page 103: ...ved in time Namely an intentional time delay will be introduced if no current magnitude change greater than 5 of IBase has been detected for any of the three phase currents 6 1 7 6 Power swings GUID 4DFED278 014F 46C2 B124 2E0809D12FC3 v2 There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power swings either from the Power Swing Blocking function ZMRPSB or an external device 6 1 7 ...

Page 104: ... X Ohm phase Ohm phase IEC11000416 2 en vsdx 2 2 2 2 2 2 IEC11000416 V2 EN US Figure 32 ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase to phase measuring ohm loop domain Section 6 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Impedance protection 98 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 105: ... main intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be interpreted and set Note in particular that the setting RFPPZx always represents the total fault resistance of the loop regardless the fact that the fault resistance arc may be divided into parts like for three phase or phase to phase faults The R1Zx jX1Zx represent the positive sequence impedance from ...

Page 106: ...o characteristic GUID 9269239B 3A04 44CD BE00 FD850D42836B v2 ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset to choose a particular measuring loop in a zone to work as mho or Offset Mho distance protection Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho c...

Page 107: ...uch with high loading and mild power swing conditions Basic operation characteristics GUID E6CC3CA7 72BE 40FC A557 7BDB62F7BC1E v2 In ZMFPDIS each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho characteristic or offset mho characteristic by setting OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx where x is 1 5 depending on selected zone ZMFPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode Zone ...

Page 108: ...he ZMFPDIS function has only one set of reach setting so the reverse will be the same as for the forward reach meaning that the non directional offset mho characteristic will always be centered around the origin In detail for Zone 1 the resistive and reactance reaches for phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault are set individually using the settings R1PPZ1 X1PPZ1 R1PEZ1 X1PEZ1 X0Z1 and R0Z1...

Page 109: ...n zone direction For Zone 1 Z R PPZ j X PPZ set 1 1 1 1 1 IECEQUATION15011 V1 EN US Equation 4 where R1PPZ1 is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase to phase fault for zone 1 X1PPZ1 is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase to phase fault for zone 1 For Zone 2 5 and RV Z R Zx j X Zx set 1 1 1 IECEQUATION15012 V1 EN US Equation 5 where R1Zx is the positive sequence resistive reac...

Page 110: ... radius where Z set 1 is settable through the resistance and reactance settings The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle β between the two compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90 figure 38 The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle The angle β for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation below 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 arg 1 L ...

Page 111: ...4224 283 v2 GUID DB8CF641 0D3F 4F7A A628 829F3DB0AC5B v1 The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional way The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth return path Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the positive and zero sequence impedance of the line It is known that the groun...

Page 112: ...ault for zone 1 R0Zx is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω phase for zone x x 2 5 or RV X0Zx is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω phase for zone x x 2 5 or RV For an earth fault in phase L1 the angle β between the compensation voltage and the polarizing voltage Upol is β arg U I I K Z U L L N set pol 1 1 3 0 1 arg IECEQUATION15021 V1 EN US Equation 8 where UL1 is t...

Page 113: ...1 7B86 4C7B BCEA 3034482BA240 v2 The condition for operation of offset mho at phase to earth fault is that the angle β between the two compensated voltages is equal to or greater than 90 see figure 40 The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle 1 1 1 1 arg 3 0 1 arg 3 0 1 L L N set L L N set U I I K Z U I I K Z IECEQUATION15022 V2 EN US Equation 9 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Secti...

Page 114: ... when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred onto the protected line The effect of load encroachment is illustrated on the left in figure 41 A load impedance within the characteristic would cause an unwanted trip The traditional way of avoiding this situation is to set the distance zone resistive reach with a security margin to the minimum load impedance The drawback w...

Page 115: ...hment is not a major problem R Z1 ArgLd RLdFw IEC09000248 3 en vsdx X RLdRv 1 IEC09000248 V3 EN US Figure 41 Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment characteristic 1 6 1 7 9 Simplified logic schemes GUID B43F2F0B C8A2 4CFD A9DD 51E167A90B56 v5 PHSL1 PHSL2 PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase selection element They correspond directly to the six loops of the d...

Page 116: ...5 of UBase sqrt 3 instead DirModeZ3 5 Forward Reverse TRUE 1 FW Ln LmLn RV Ln LmLn FW Ln LmLn FW Ln LmLn RV Ln LmLn IEC12000137 2 en vsd IEC12000137 V3 EN US Figure 42 Connection of directional signals to Zones Section 6 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Impedance protection 110 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 117: ...AND AND DIRL3Zx DIRL1L2Zx DIRL2L3Zx DIRL3L1Zx L1Zx PEZx L2Zx PPZx OR OR OR AND AND AND AND AND AND Integer to Bool L1N L2N L3N L1L2 L2L3 L1L3 RELCNDZx IEC12000140 2 en vsdx L3Zx IEC12000140 V2 EN US Figure 43 Intermediate logic 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 6 Impedance protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 111 Technical manual ...

Page 118: ...eLinkStart Phase Selection 1st starting zone VTSZ BLKZx BLKTRZx OR OR OR OR OR AND AND OR AND AND AND TimerModeZx Enable PhPh or Ph E PhPh AND AND EXTNST External start IEC12000139 4 en vsdx IEC12000139 V4 EN US Figure 44 Logic for linking of timers Section 6 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Impedance protection 112 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 119: ...L2Zx STL3Zx AND AND AND TZx BLOCK VTSZ BLKZx t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STNDZx OR OR L1Zx L2Zx PPZx NDZx OR PEZx IEC12000138 2 en vsd IEC12000138 V2 EN US Figure 45 Start and trip outputs 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 6 Impedance protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 113 Technical manual ...

Page 120: ...D t 15 ms AND STARTND OR OR t 15 ms AND STPHS t 15 ms AND STPP STPE IEC12000133 2 en vsd IEC12000133 V2 EN US Figure 46 Additional start outputs 1 Section 6 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Impedance protection 114 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 121: ...d IEC12000134 V2 EN US Figure 47 Additional start outputs 2 PHSL1 PHSL1L2 PHSL2L3 STRVL2 STRVL3 RVL1 RVL2 RVL1L2 RVL3 RVL2L3 RVL3L1 BLOCK VTSZ OR t 15 ms AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR OR OR IN present t 15 ms AND t 15 ms AND STRVPE AND IEC12000141 2 en vsdx IEC12000141 V2 EN US Figure 48 Additional start outputs 3 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 6 Impedance protection Line distance protection REL65...

Page 122: ...ed settings Zero point clamping GUID 4894EF16 3376 48EB 863F 9CE14487ACAB v1 Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored The zero point clamping limit is a setting XZeroDb where X equals Z Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417 140 v5 Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the...

Page 123: ...he hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417 150 v4 The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely The measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode The following basic reporting modes are a...

Page 124: ...EMOD54417 163 v6 If a measuring value is changed compared to the last reported value and the change is larger than the ΔY pre defined limits that are set by user XDbRepInt then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary Figure 51 shows an example with the amplitude dead band supervision The picture is simplified the process...

Page 125: ...ied the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other The last value reported Y1 in figure 52 serves as a basic value for further measurement A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment discrete integral The absolute values of these integral values are ...

Page 126: ...EC61850 Phase to earth impedance measurement is calculated based on UL1 IL1 UL2 IL2 UL3 IL3 and phase to phase impedance is calculated based on 1 2 1 2 L L L L U U I I 2 3 2 3 L L L L U U I I 3 1 3 1 L L L L U U I I where ULX and ILX are phase to earth voltage and phase current When the operating current is too low the impedance measurement can be erroneous To avoid such error minimum operating cu...

Page 127: ...esistance reach Ph E and Ph Ph 0 01 9000 00 ohm l Dynamic overreach 5 at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0 5 SIR 30 IEC 60255 121 Reset ratio 105 typically Directional blinders Forward 15 120 degrees Reverse 165 60 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp 2 0 degrees IEC 60255 121 Resistance determining the load impedance area forward 0 01 5000 00 ohm p Pseudo continuous ramp 2 0 of set value Conditions T...

Page 128: ...ccurrence of earth fault currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function to allow fault clearance 6 2 3 Function block M13884 3 v5 IEC06000264 2 en vsd ZMRPSB I3P U3P BLOCK BLKI01 BLKI02 BLK1PH REL1PH BLK2PH REL2PH I0CHECK TRSP EXTERNAL START ZOUT ZIN IEC06000264 V2 EN US Figure 53 ZMRPSB function block 6 2 4 Signals PID 3663 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 38 ZMRPSB Input signals Name Type Defau...

Page 129: ...ed impedance within inner impedance boundary 6 2 5 Settings PID 3663 SETTINGS v6 Table 40 ZMRPSB Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Mode On Off X1InFw 0 01 3000 00 Ohm p 0 01 30 00 Inner reactive boundary forward R1LIn 0 01 1000 00 Ohm p 0 01 30 00 Line resistance for inner characteristic angle R1FInFw 0 01 1000 00 Ohm l 0 01 30 00 F...

Page 130: ...inhibit at very slow swing Table 42 ZMRPSB Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 6 2 6 Operation principle M13877 4 v4 Power swing detection ZMRPSB function comprises an inner and an outer quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment as shown in figure 54 Its principle of o...

Page 131: ...esponding phase L1 L2 and L3 Rset Re n n I U L L ø ö ç ç è æ EQUATION1183 V2 EN US Equation 10 Im n n Xset I U L L ø ö ç ç è æ EQUATION1184 V2 EN US Equation 11 The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries 6 2 6 1 Resistive reach in forward direction M13877 6 v3 To avoid load encroachment the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive...

Page 132: ...d fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant 6 2 6 2 Resistive reach in reverse direction M13877 15 v3 To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction the resistive reach is limited by setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment zone The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the setting parameter kLdRRv...

Page 133: ...the magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current IMinOpPE ZMRPSB function can operate in two operating modes The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the three phases Figure 55 presents a composition of an internal detection signal DET L1 in this particular phase The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in ...

Page 134: ...ND ZOUTL1 loop ZOUTL2 ZOUTL3 OR detected OR loop 0 tP1 0 0 tP2 0 0 0 tW IEC05000113 V2 EN US Figure 55 Detection of power swing in phase L1 IEC01000057 2 en vsd DET L1 DET L2 DET L3 DET1of3 int DET2of3 int 1 1 IEC01000057 TIFF V2 EN US Figure 56 Detection of power swing for 1 of 3 and 2 of 3 operating mode Section 6 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Impedance protection 128 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IE...

Page 135: ...MRPSB The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 55 and figure 56 respectively Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the functional input signals REL1PH BLK1PH REL2PH and BLK2PH The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter OperationLdCh Off but notice that the DFw and DRv will st...

Page 136: ... all three phases This function prevents the operation of ZMRPSB function in cases when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single phase fault after single phase autoreclosing dead time if the initial single phase fault and single phase opening of the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases 6 2 7 Technical data M16036 1 v10 Table 43 ZMRPSB technical data Function ...

Page 137: ...SOTF duration after the enabling signal is reset The protection function can be enabled for tripping during the activated time by connecting the functions included in the terminal to the ZACC input Therefore the start of the selected protection functions connected to ZACC during the enabled condition results in an immediate TRIP output from the function 6 3 3 Function block SEMOD156265 4 v6 IEC060...

Page 138: ...n 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Time delay for UI detection s tSOTF 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 1 000 Drop off delay time of switch onto fault function tDLD 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Delay time for activation of dead line detection tOperate 0 03 120 00 s 0 01 0 03 Time delay to operate of switch onto fault function Table 47 ZCVPSOF Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Gl...

Page 139: ...et to Current If all three phase voltages are below the setting UPh and the AutoInitMode setting is set to Voltage If all three phase currents and voltages are below the settings IPh and UPh and the AutoInitMode setting is set to Current Voltage Once the dead line drops off after energization or once BC drops off the activated signal is extended for the duration of tSOTF The internal signal SOTFUI...

Page 140: ...meter Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage detection of dead line 1 100 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Operate current detection of dead line 1 100 of IBase 1 0 of Ir Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault function 0 03 120 00 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater Time delay for UI detection 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater Delay time for activation of dead line detection 0 000 60 00...

Page 141: ... zone 1 which normally includes the generator and its step up power transformer If the center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system in zone 2 more than one pole slip is usually allowed before the generator transformer unit is disconnected A parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time If there are several out of step relays in the pow...

Page 142: ...BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in generating direction BLKMOT BOOLEAN 0 Block operation in motor direction EXTZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings PID 3539 OUTPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 51 OOSPPAM Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip issued when either zone 1 or zone 2 give trip TRIPZ1 BOOLEAN Zone 1 trip TRIPZ2 BOOLEAN Zone 2 trip START BOOLEAN Set when measured i...

Page 143: ...on NoOfSlipsZ1 1 20 1 1 Number of pole slips in zone 1 required to get zone 1 trip NoOfSlipsZ2 1 60 1 3 Number of pole slips in zone 2 required to get zone 2 trip tReset 1 000 60 000 s 0 001 6 000 Time without any slip required to completely reset function Table 54 OOSPPAM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global...

Page 144: ...e out of step function UCOSPHI REAL kV Estimated Ucos Phi voltage during pole slip in V 6 4 7 Operation principle GUID 787EEB01 B760 4D4B AB4E 1DCD6ABFFF5E v6 General Under balanced and stable conditions a generator operates with a constant rotor angle power angle delivering active electrical power to the power system which is approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis...

Page 145: ...t that point Under the fault conditions the generator accelerated and when the fault was finally cleared the complex impedance Z R X jumped to the point 2 By that time the generator has already lost its step Z R X continues its way from the right hand side to the left hand side and the 1st pole slip cannot be avoided If the generator is not immediately disconnected it will continue pole slipping s...

Page 146: ...Figure 61 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 Time in millis econds Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian Z in Ohms angle in rad normal load fault 500 ms Z R X cros s ed the impedance line Z line connecting points SE RE fault occurrs Z R X under fault lies on the impedance line or near for 3 ph faults Under 3 phas e fault condition rotor angle of app 180 degrees is meas ure...

Page 147: ...F0A4E707 v6 A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the power system in which OOSPPAM is installed is modeled as a two machine equivalent system or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system Then the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM in the direction of the normal load flow that is from the measurement point to the remote system ca...

Page 148: ...tor 13 8 kV 13 8 kV Power line 220 kV Infinite power system Out Of Step protection OOSPPAM Transformer 13 8 220 kV System equivalent REG Zgen Rgen Xgen Ztr Rtr Xtr Zline Rline Xline Zeq Req Xeq ReverseZ ReverseR ReverseX ForwardZ ForwardR ForwardX ReverseR Rg ForwardR Rtr Rline Req ReverseX Xd ForwardX Xtr Xline Xeq All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13 8 kV SE RE IEC10000113...

Page 149: ...no return because if this angle is reached under generator power swings the generator is most likely to lose step 6 4 7 2 Detecting an out of step condition GUID 5BBAE253 3D01 4C97 A7CF A12084FD1810 v4 An out of step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power so there are also periodic changes of rotational speed currents ...

Page 150: ...recognize that a pole slip has occurred The value of the internal constant traverseTimeMin is a function of the set StartAngle For values of StartAngle 110 traverseTimeMin 50 ms For values StartAngle 110 traverseTimeMin 40 ms The expression which relates the maximum slip frequency fsMax and the traverseTimeMin is as follows fsMax Hz traverseTimeMin ms StartAngle 1000 1 000 180 IECEQUATION2319 V1 E...

Page 151: ... degrees A recommended value for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less for example 60 degrees Figure 66 illustrates the case with TripAngle 90 degrees The offset Mho circle represents loci of the complex impedance Z R X for which the rotor power angle is 90 degrees If the circuit breaker must not open before the rotor angle has reached 90 degrees on its way towards 0 degrees then it is clear...

Page 152: ...sents loci of the impedance Z R X for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Current in kA trip command to CB rotor angle in rad Time in milliseconds pos seq current in kA trip command to CB rotor angle in radian fault occurs normal load current min current very high currents due to out of step condition after 1st pole slip 2nd rotor angle angle tow...

Page 153: ...lex positive sequence impedance Z R X UPSRE UPSIM UPSMAG R IPSRE IPSIM Z R X Z R X within limit of reach X NO Return YES Z R X within lens characteristic NO YES Z R X entered lens from Function alert RIGHT LEFT Z R X exited lens on the left hand side NO YES YES pole slip Was traverse time more than 50 ms Motor losing step Generator losing step NO X R Calculation of positive sequence active power P...

Page 154: ... sequence current release For cross country faults the logic selects either the leading or lagging phase earth loop for measurement It initiates operation on the preferred fault based on the selected phase preference A number of different phase preference combinations are available for selection PPL2PHIZ provides an additional phase selection criteria namely under voltage criteria suitable for cro...

Page 155: ...roup signal for current input U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function RELL1N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L1 to earth loop RELL2N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L2 to earth loop RELL3N BOOLEAN 0 Release condition for the L3 to earth loop PID 6809 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 59 PPL2PHIZ Output signals Name Type Description START BOOLEAN Indicates sta...

Page 156: ...l voltage tOffUN 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Dropoff delay for residual voltage tIN 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Pickup delay for residual current Table 61 PPL2PHIZ Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 6 5 6 Operation principle GUID B304D0D3 1E4E 482D 975F 229467905608 v1 The PPL2PHIZ function ...

Page 157: ...ent 3I0 above setting level IN Transient residual currents associated with single phase fault inception are not allowed to release the distance protection This is taken care of by a time on delay tIN which should be set longer than the expected duration of the transient If a single phase fault remains for some time it is possible to bypass the tIN time delay since the next fault event is expected ...

Page 158: ...s an additional phase selection based on voltage PPL2PHIZ is designed to detect two phase faults based on under voltage in two phases or between two phases OR startU ULxLy UPP L3L1 L2L3 L1L2 ULx UPN L3 L2 L1 3U0 3U0 AND AND AND OR OR OR AND startUL1 startUL2 startUL3 OR OR OR startUL1L2 startUL2L3 startUL3L1 IEC16000019 1 en vsdx IEC16000019 V1 EN US Figure 72 Phase selection The voltage phase sel...

Page 159: ...es are released constantly leaving it to the phase selection inside the distance protection to decide which distance zone loops should be allowed to operate zrelL1 zrelL2 zrelL3 TRUE TRUE TRUE IEC16000021 1 en vsdx IEC16000021 V1 EN US Figure 74 No Filter mode No Filter mode is equivalent to disconnecting the PPL2PHIZ from the distance protection No Preference mode GUID 3D947DCA 7938 4C44 8BA6 4DA...

Page 160: ...preference scheme and release the distance protection Since it could a be non preferred phase a time delay of 40 ms is provided to release if only one phase is detected in order to wait for the second phase to be activated If no second phase is detected within 40 ms the single phase is released without preference Additionaly there are some cases where no release would be issued All three phases ar...

Page 161: ...024 1 en vsdx IEC16000024 V1 EN US Figure 77 Phase preference 2 Table 62 shows the preferred phase for each detected cross country fault type and operating mode OperMode Table 62 Preferred phase for each cross country fault type and operating mode Operating mode start in L1 L2 start in L2 L3 start in L3 L1 1231c L1 L2 L3 1321c L2 L3 L1 123a L1 L2 L1 132a L1 L3 L1 213a L2 L2 L1 231a L2 L2 L3 312a L...

Page 162: ...alue of ZREL will always be at least 8 16 32 56 For example If only L1N is active then the value is 1 56 57 If start L1N and L3N are active then the value is 1 4 56 61 The BLOCK input will only block the enabling signals for phase to earth loops phase to phase loops are still released The PPL2PHIZ is designed not to have any influence on the phase to phase loops of the distance protection BLOCK TR...

Page 163: ...e 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio residual current 95 Independent time delay for residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 25 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for residual voltage at 0 8 to 1 2 x Uset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 25 ms whichever is greater Independent dropoff delay for residual voltage at 1 2 to 0 8 x Uset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 25 ms whichever i...

Page 164: ...158 ...

Page 165: ...ransient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short circuit protection function 7 1 3 Function block M12602 3 v6 IEC04000391 2 en vsd PHPIOC I3P BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 IEC04000391 V2 EN US Figure 79 PHPIOC function block 7 1 4 Signals IP11433 1 v2 PID 6914 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 64 PHPIOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase curr...

Page 166: ... Default Description IP Min 5 2500 IB 1 5 Minimum used operate phase current level in of IBase if IP is less than IP Min then IP is set to IP Min IP Max 5 2500 IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate phase current level in of IBase if IP is greater than IP Max then IP is set to IP Max StValMult 0 5 5 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for operate current level Table 68 PHPIOC Non group settings basic Name Values Range U...

Page 167: ...nals must be activated for trip There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current StValMult via a binary input ENMULT In some applications the operation value needs to be changed for example due to transformer inrush currents The operation current value IP is limited to be between IP Max and IP Min The default values of the limits are the same as the setting limi...

Page 168: ...0 x Iset Dynamic overreach 5 at t 100 ms 7 2 Directional phase overcurrent protection four steps OC4PTOC SEMOD129998 1 v8 7 2 1 Identification M14885 1 v6 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Directional phase overcurrent protection four steps OC4PTOC TOC REVA V2 EN US 51_67 7 2 2 Functionality M12846 3 v17 Directional phase overcurre...

Page 169: ...PTOC I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 ST2NDHRM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 STDIRCND IEC06000187 4 en vsdx IEC06000187 V4 EN US Figure 81 OC4PTOC f...

Page 170: ...p4 PID 6973 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 72 OC4PTOC Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2 TR3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3 TR4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4 TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1 TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2 TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3 TR1L1 BOOLEAN ...

Page 171: ...tep2 phase L2 ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3 ST3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L1 ST3L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L2 ST3L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L3 ST4L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L1 ST4L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L2 ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3 ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected DIRL1 INTEGER D...

Page 172: ... curve type for step 1 I1 5 2500 IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1 in of IBase t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 1 k1 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 IMin1 1 10000 IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse ...

Page 173: ... 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 I2Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 DirMode3 Off Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 3 off nodir forward reverse Characterist3 ANSI Ext inv ANSI Very inv ANSI Norm inv ANSI Mod inv ANSI Def Time L T E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv...

Page 174: ...Operating phase current level for step 4 in of IBase t4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 4 k4 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 IMin4 1 10000 IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in of IBase t4Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 I4Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Mu...

Page 175: ...om harmonic restrain I2 Min 5 2500 IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current level for step 2 in of IBase if I2 is less than I2 Min then I2 is set to I2 Min I2 Max 5 2500 IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current level for step 2 in of IBase if I2 is greater than I2 Max then I2 is set to I2 Max ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for ...

Page 176: ...ve for step 3 tTRCrv3 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 tCRCrv3 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 HarmBlock3 Off On Off Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain I4 Min 5 2500 IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current level for step 4 in of IBase if I4 is less than I4 Min then I4 is set to I4 Min I4 Max 5...

Page 177: ...PID 6973 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 76 OC4PTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description DIRL1 INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction for phase1 DIRL2 INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction for phase2 DIRL3 INTEGER 1 Forward 2 Reverse 0 No direction Direction for phase3 IL1 REAL A Current in phase L1 IL2 REAL A Current in phase L2 IL3 REAL A Current in phase L3...

Page 178: ...eration These settings can be chosen 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the function OC4PTOC it is possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages Either discrete Fourier filter DFT or true RMS filter RMS can be selected If the DFT option is selected only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency co...

Page 179: ...ectional The direction of a fault is given as the current angle in relation to the voltage angle The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function are dependent on the fault type The selection of the measured value DFT or RMS does not influence the operation of the directional part of OC4PTOC To enable directional measurement at close in faults causing a low measured voltage the pol...

Page 180: ...rrent 7 of the set terminal rated current IBase the condition seals in If the fault has caused tripping the trip endures If the fault was detected in the reverse direction the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation If the current decreases below the minimum operating value the memory resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10 of its rated value The directional s...

Page 181: ...steps The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or an inverse time delay characteristic A wide range of standardized inverse time delay characteristics is available It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section Inverse characteristics a b a b OR IOP STx TRx AND Ix BLKSTx B...

Page 182: ...switching state The operation current value Ix is limited to be between Ix Max and Ix Min The default values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for Ix and the limits can only be used for reducing the allowed range of Ix This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is allowed making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable If Ix is s...

Page 183: ... can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK The binary input BLKSTx x 1 2 3 or 4 blocks the operation of the respective step The start signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKST The trip signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKTR GUID E3980B2D EEDA 4BF1 A07D E7B721130554 v5 A harmonic restrain of the directional phase overcurrent protection function ...

Page 184: ...nd harmonic blocking 5 100 of fundamental 2 0 of Ir Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset step 1 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 1 4 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Inverse time characteristics see table 674 table 675 and table 676 16 curve types See table 674 table 675 and table 676 Operate time start non direction...

Page 185: ... percent of the line at minimum source impedance EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from a separate current input 7 3 3 Function block M12614 3 v6 EFPIOC I3P BLOCK BLKAR ENMULT TRIP IEC06000269 3 en vsdx IEC06000269 V3 EN US Figure 88 EFPIOC function block 7 3 4 Signals IP11448 1 v2 PID 6915 INPUTSIG...

Page 186: ...vel in of IBase if IN is greater than IN Max then IN is set to IN Max StValMult 0 5 5 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for operate current level Table 83 EFPIOC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 7 3 6 Monitored data PID 6915 MONITOREDDATA v4 Table 84 EFPIOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit ...

Page 187: ... making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable If IN is set outside IN Max and IN Min the closest of the limits to IN is used by the function If IN Max is smaller then IN Min the limits are swapped The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 89 hi u lo y MIN MAX IN _used IN Max IN IN Min IEC17000015 1 en vsdx IEC17000015 V1 EN US Figure 89 Logic for limitation of ...

Page 188: ...ults It can also be used to provide a system back up for example in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic EF4PTOC can be set to be direc...

Page 189: ...rrent U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for polarizing voltage I3PPOL GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for polarizing current I3PDIR GROUP SIGNAL Group connection for directional current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 Start and trip BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 Start and trip BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 Start and trip BLKST4 BOOLE...

Page 190: ...nal step 2 STIN3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3 STIN4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4 STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction 2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal 7 4 5 Settings IP11454 1 v2 PID 6967 SETTINGS v3 Table 88 EF4PTOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Def...

Page 191: ...me SOTF UnderTime Off SOTF operation mode Off SOTF Undertime SOTF Undertime ActivationSOTF Open Closed CloseCommand Open Select signal to activate SOTF CB Open Closed Close cmd StepForSOTF Step 2 Step 3 Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF HarmBlkSOTF Off On Off Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF tSOTF 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Time delay for SOTF t4U 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 1 0...

Page 192: ...of IBase t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 1 IN1Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for the residual current setting value for step 1 HarmBlock1 Off On On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain DirMode2 Off Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 2 Off Non dir Forward Reverse Characterist2 ANSI Ext inv AN...

Page 193: ...v IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay characteristic for step 3 IN3 1 2500 IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step 3 in of IBase t3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Def time delay or add time delay for inverse char of step 3 k3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected time charac...

Page 194: ... for the residual current setting value for step 4 HarmBlock4 Off On On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain Table 89 EF4PTOC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description IN1 Min 1 2500 IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current level for step 1 in of IBase if IN1 is less than IN1 Min then IN1 is set to IN1 Min IN1 Max 1 2500 IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate res...

Page 195: ...or step 2 tACrv2 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tBCrv2 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tCCrv2 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 2 tPRCrv2 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve for step 2 tTRCrv2 0 005 100 000 0 001 13 500 Par...

Page 196: ...t4 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset time delay for step 4 tPCrv4 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 4 tACrv4 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 4 tBCrv4 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 4 tCCrv4 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for ...

Page 197: ...OL input used for the current polarizing quantity Provides polarizing current to the directional functionality This current is normally taken from the grounding of a power transformer 4 I3PDIR input used for directional detection Supplies either the zero or the negative sequence current to the directional functionality These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre processing function block...

Page 198: ... IL2 IL3 0 EQUATION1874 V2 EN US Equation 22 where IL1 IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents The residual current is pre processed by a discrete Fourier filter Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived The phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current val...

Page 199: ... of the residual voltage is derived This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current in order to determine the direction to the earth fault Forward Reverse In order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter UPolMin It shall be noted that residual voltage 3U0 or negative sequenc...

Page 200: ...nce in order to calculate the equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula 0s UIPol Z IPol RNPol j XNPol IPol EQUATION1877 V2 EN US Equation 27 which will be then used together with the phasor of the operating current in order to determine the direction to the earth fault forward reverse In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of the polarizing current s...

Page 201: ...thin the protection M13941 152 v6 The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED Base current IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes Base voltage UBase shall be entered as rated phase to phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV 7 4 7 6 Internal earth fault protection structure M13941 157 v5 The protection...

Page 202: ...e to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1 The operation current value INx is limited to be between ...

Page 203: ...ry input BLKTR 7 4 7 8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function M13941 179 v11 At least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function The protection has an integrated directional feature As the operating quantity curr...

Page 204: ...ional supervision element are The directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of IN Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in the set direction The relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic The directional comparison will set the output binary signals 1 STFW 1 wh...

Page 205: ... Number a a b b T F 0 0 polMethod Current OR IEC07000067 V6 EN US Figure 94 Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step 7 4 7 9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941 200 v8 A harmonic restrain can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmBlockx If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequenc...

Page 206: ...le delayed compared to the first transformer Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by using se...

Page 207: ... is set to activate SOTF the under time logic or both When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault for example during an autoreclosing sequence The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations The time during which SOTF and under time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U The SOTF logic uses th...

Page 208: ...ly after switching of the circuit breaker The under time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime This delay is normally set to a relatively short time default 300 ms UNDERTIME...

Page 209: ...hnical data IP11455 1 v1 M15223 1 v17 Table 92 EF4PTOC technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate current step 1 4 1 2500 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio 95 at 10 2500 of IBase Relay characteristic angle RCA 180 to 180 degrees 2 0 degrees Operate current for directional release 1 100 of IBase For RCA 60 degrees 2 5 of Ir at I Ir 2 5 of I at I Ir Independent tim...

Page 210: ...20 ms Max 35 ms Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 7 5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID E8CF8AA2 AF54 4FD1 A379 3E55DCA2FA3A v1 7 5 1 Identification GUID E1720ADA 7F80 4F2C 82A1 EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number ...

Page 211: ...k end infeed functionality are available 7 5 3 Function block GUID 8EDB8B12 0D86 4F6B A1FB F5D0C72AA545 v2 NS4PTOC I3P I3PDIR U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STFW STRV IEC10000054 2 en vsd IEC10000054 V2 EN US Figure 98 NS4PTOC function block 7 5 4 Signals PID 4151 INPUTSIGNALS v4 Table 93 NS4PTOC Input signals ...

Page 212: ...BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4 START BOOLEAN General start signal ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1 ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2 ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3 ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4 STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal 7 5 5 Settings PID 4151 SETTINGS v4 Table 95 NS4PTOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Des...

Page 213: ...5 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time characteristic IMin1 1 00 10000 00 IB 1 00 100 00 Minimum current for step 1 t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristic step 1 I1Mult 1 0 10 0 0 1 2 0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 DirMode2 Off Non directional Forward Reverse Non directional Directional mode of step 2 off nodir f...

Page 214: ... E inv L T V inv L T inv IEC Norm inv IEC Very inv IEC inv IEC Ext inv IEC S T inv IEC L T inv IEC Def Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type ANSI Def Time Time delay characteristic for step 3 I2 3 1 2500 IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for step 3 in of IBase t3 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time char is selected k3 0 05 999 00 0 01 0 05 Time multipli...

Page 215: ...ble 96 NS4PTOC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1 Instantaneous IEC ANSI tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 020 Reset time delay for step 1 tPCrv1 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 1 tACrv1 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for cu...

Page 216: ...Param P for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tACrv3 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Param A for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tBCrv3 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Param B for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tCCrv3 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Param C for customized inverse trip time curve for step 3 tPRCrv3 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500 Param PR for customized inverse reset time curve f...

Page 217: ...A 431B 9699 EB67E2637560 v3 Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool 1 I3P input used for Operating Quantity 2 U3P input used for Polarizing Quantity 3 I3PDIR input used for Directional finding These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre processing function blocks in the Confi...

Page 218: ... 68250798851B v3 A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault Forward Reverse Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the voltage polarizing method NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage U2 as polarizing quantity U3P This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED The pre processing block c...

Page 219: ... negative sequence protection schemes permissive or blocking Each part is described separately in the following sections 7 5 7 5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID D8ACB136 2BA6 4ADA A096 5C38BD12DB72 v2 Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 negative sequence current as measuring quantity Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built in facilities Operating mo...

Page 220: ...acteristx DefTime DirModex Off DirModex Non directional DirModex Forward DirModex Reverse AND AND FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int OR BLKTR OR STAGEx_DIR_Int IEC09000683 vsd AND AND Characteristx Inverse Inverse txmin tx IEC09000683 V3 EN US Figure 99 Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x where x 1 2 3 or 4 NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK The start...

Page 221: ...ent Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40 of I Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in the operating characteristic Directional comparison step built in within di...

Page 222: ...gram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step is shown in figure 101 X a b a b I Dir FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int BLOCK STAGE1_DIR_Int 0 6 X 0 4 a b a b AND STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int OR STRV UPolMin IPolMin AngleRCA D i r e c ti o n a l C h a r a c t e ri s ti c FWD RVS AND AND AND STFW FORWARD_Int REVERSE_Int AND IEC07000067 4 vsd Iop UPol Iop ...

Page 223: ...for directional release 1 100 of IBase For RCA 60 degrees 2 5 of Ir at I Ir 2 5 of I at I Ir Minimum polarizing voltage 1 100 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Operate time start non directional at 0 to 2 x Iset Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Reset time start non directional at 2 x Iset to 0 Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time start non directional at 0 to 10 x Iset Min 5 ms Max 20 ms Reset time start non directional at 10 x ...

Page 224: ...etween the phase conductors and earth the residual current always has 90º phase shift compared to the residual voltage 3U0 The characteristic angle is chosen to 90º in such a network In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed with a parallel resistor the active residual current component in phase with the residual voltage should be used for the earth fault detection In such network...

Page 225: ...culated connection is needed to all three phase inputs Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN If a connection is made to GRPxN this signal is used else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1 GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs 3I0 and 3U0 will be used 7 6 3 Function block SEMOD172780 4 v6 IEC07000032 2 en vsd SDEPSDE I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN B...

Page 226: ... the directional residual over current function TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage START BOOLEAN General start of the function STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current function STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over vo...

Page 227: ... current prot in of IBase tDef 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent in sec SRef 0 03 200 00 SB 0 01 10 00 Reference value of res power for inverse time count in of SBase kSN 0 00 2 00 0 01 0 10 Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode OpINNonDir Off On Off Operation of non directional residual overcurrent protection INNonDir 1 00 400 00...

Page 228: ... tPCrv 0 005 3 000 0 001 1 000 Setting P for customer programmable curve tACrv 0 005 200 000 0 001 13 500 Setting A for customer programmable curve tBCrv 0 00 20 00 0 01 0 00 Setting B for customer programmable curve tCCrv 0 1 10 0 0 1 1 0 Setting C for customer programmable curve ResetTypeCrv Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off tPRCrv 0 005 3 000 0 001 0 500...

Page 229: ...s The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub functions included Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos φ SEMOD171963 8 v7 φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage φ ang 3I0 ang Uref The reference voltage Uref is the polarizing quantity which is used for directionality and is defined as Uref 3U0 e jRCADir tha...

Page 230: ...age 3U0 must be larger than the set levels INCosPhi INRel and UNRel Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 109 Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get act...

Page 231: ... ref U U IEC06000650 V2 EN US Figure 106 Characteristic with ROADir restriction The function indicates forward reverse direction to the fault Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos φ 180 the set value It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 107 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 7 Current protection Lin...

Page 232: ...mplified logical diagram in Figure 109 For trip the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos φ the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels SN INRel and UNRel Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for th...

Page 233: ... shall be larger than both INRel and INDir and residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel In addition the angle φ shall be in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 109 Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR When the function picks up binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated If the output sign...

Page 234: ...3I0 shall be larger than the set level INNonDir Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN When the function picks up binary output signal STNDIN is activated If the output signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated Residual overvoltage release and protection SEMOD171963 7...

Page 235: ...SEMOD173350 2 v16 Table 107 SDEPSDE technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate level for 3I0 cosj directional residual overcurrent 0 25 200 00 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Operate level for 3I0 3U0 cosj directional residual power 0 25 200 00 of SBase 1 0 of Sr at S Sr 1 0 of S at S Sr Operate level for 3I0 and j residual overcurrent 0 25 200 00 of IBase 1 0 of Ir at Ir ...

Page 236: ...000 60 000 s 0 2 or 75 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for non directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 75 ms whichever is greater Independent time delay for directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 170 ms whichever is greater Inverse characteristics see table 677 Table 678 and Table 679 16 curve types See Table 677 Table...

Page 237: ...nheit An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the line is tripped Estimated time to trip before operation and estimated time to reclose after operation are presented 7 7 3 Function block M12627 3 v8 LCPTTR I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENMULT AMBTEMP SENSFLT RESET TRIP START ALARM LOCKOUT IEC13000199 1 en vsd IEC13000199 V1 EN US LFPTTR I3P BLOCK BLKTR ENMULT AMBTEMP SEN...

Page 238: ...nt multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter PID 3908 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 110 LCPTTR Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip START BOOLEAN Start Signal ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal LOCKOUT...

Page 239: ... C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off DefaultTemp 50 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient temperature at startup Table 113 LCPTTR Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups PID 3909 SETTINGS v8 Table 114 LFPTTR Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Defau...

Page 240: ... LCPTTR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TTRIP INTEGER Estimated time to trip in min TENRECL REAL Estimated time to reset of lockout in min TEMP REAL deg Calculated temperature of the device TEMPAMB REAL deg Ambient temperature used in the calculations TERMLOAD REAL Temperature relative to operate temperature PID 3909 MONITOREDDATA v7 Table 117 LFPTTR Monitored data Name Type...

Page 241: ...emperature If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level TripTemp a START output signal is activated The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as 1 1 1 t n n final n e t D æ ö Q Q Q Q ç è ø EQUATION1168 V1 EN US Equation 32 where Qn is the calculated present temperature Qn 1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step Qfinal is the calcul...

Page 242: ...n The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET _ _ ln final lockout release lockout release final n t t æ ö Q Q ç ç Q Q è ø EQUATION1170 V1 EN US Equation 34 In the above equation the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal TENRECL This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT ...

Page 243: ...on of time to reset of lockout Calculation of actual temperature Lockout logic AMBTEMP START TEMP TRIP LOCKOUT TTRIP TENRECL I3P ENMULT SENSFLT ALARM BLKTR BLOCK IEC09000637 2 en vsd IEC09000637 V2 EN US Figure 111 Functional overview of LCPTTR LFPTTR 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 7 Current protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 237 Technical manual ...

Page 244: ...eater Alarm temperature 0 200 C 0 400 F 2 0 C 4 0 F Operate temperature 0 300 C 0 600 F 2 0 C 4 0 F Reset level temperature 0 300 C 0 600 F 2 0 C 4 0 F 7 8 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514 1 v6 7 8 1 Identification M14878 1 v5 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Breaker failure protection 3 phase activation and output CCRBRF...

Page 245: ...7 8 3 Function block M11944 3 v7 IEC06000188 2 en vsd CCRBRF I3P BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM IEC06000188 V2 EN US Figure 112 CCRBRF function block 7 8 4 Signals PID 3562 INPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 119 CCRBRF Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Three phase group signal for current inputs BLOCK BOOLEAN ...

Page 246: ...tion Operation Off On Off Operation Off On FunctionMode Current Contact Current Contact Current Detection for trip based on Current Contact Current Contact BuTripMode 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 1 out of 3 Back up trip modes 2 out of 4 or 1 out of 3 or 1 out of 4 RetripMode Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check Retrip Off Oper mode of re trip logic OFF CB Pos Check No CB Pos Check IP 5 200 I...

Page 247: ...inciple M16914 3 v9 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from the protection trip command either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices The start signal can be phase selective or general for all three phases Phase selective start signals enable single pole re trip function This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done The re trip attem...

Page 248: ...trip pulse and the back up trip pulse 2 are settable The re trip pulse the back up trip pulse and the back up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker In the current detection it is possible to use three different options 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open high current in one pole 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect fail...

Page 249: ...00977 2 en vsd FunctionMode OR OR Current Contact Current and Contact 1 IP CB Closed L1 IL1 IEC09000977 V2 EN US Figure 114 Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF CB position evaluation t t1 tPulse AND AND OR OR OR TRRETL3 TRRETL2 BFP Started L1 Retrip Time Out L1 CB Closed L1 TRRET TRRETL1 CBFLT CB Pos Check No CBPos Check OR From other phases IEC09000978 4 en vsd RetripMode 1 30ms IEC09000978 V4 ...

Page 250: ... High L2 Current High L3 have logical value 1 when the current in the respective phase has the magnitude larger than the setting parameter IP 7 8 8 Technical data IP10269 1 v1 M12353 1 v13 Table 126 CCRBRF technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate phase current 5 200 of lBase 1 0 of Ir at I Ir 1 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio phase current 95 Operate residual current 2 200 of lBase 1 0 o...

Page 251: ...entification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Pole discordance protection CCPDSC PD SYMBOL S V1 EN US 52PD 7 9 2 Functionality M13269 3 v15 An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions Normally the own breaker is tripped to co...

Page 252: ...er to CB OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three ...

Page 253: ... in of IBase Table 130 CCPDSC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups 7 9 6 Monitored data PID 3525 MONITOREDDATA v6 Table 131 CCPDSC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IMin REAL A Lowest phase current IMax REAL A Highest phase current 7 9 7 Operation principle M13273 3 v6 T...

Page 254: ...this case the logic is realized within the function If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement The sampled analog phase currents are pre processed in a discrete Fourier filter DFT block From the fundamental frequency components of...

Page 255: ...ent based CCPDSC is blocked if The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance protection It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other...

Page 256: ...he highest current in the three phases the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase If these conditions are true an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or clo...

Page 257: ...22 2FF68420FADF v6 Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function can be used as generator backup protection against short circuits The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic Additionally it can be voltage controlled restrained One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is al...

Page 258: ...voltage function START BOOLEAN General start signal STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent stage STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function 7 10 5 Settings PID 3858 SETTINGS v7 Table 135 VRPVOC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On StartCurr 2 0 5000 0 IB 1 0 120 0 Start current level in of IBase ...

Page 259: ...nternal low voltage level for blocking of UV in of UBase Table 136 VRPVOC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description VDepMode Step Slope Slope Voltage dependent mode OC step slope VDepFact 5 0 100 0 0 1 25 0 Start current level in of pickup when U 25 of UBase UHighLimit 30 0 100 0 UB 0 1 100 0 Voltage high limit setting in of UBase Table 137 VRPVOC Non group settings b...

Page 260: ...ares the magnitude of the measured current quantity with the set start level The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is higher than the set level Voltage restraint control feature GUID E7C59BAD 47A1 46C2 8929 7E589548045C v3 The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage quantity This means that the start level of the overcurrent ...

Page 261: ...current when setting parameter VDepMode Step the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 123 UBase Start level of the current StartCurr VDepFact StartCurr UHighLimit IEC10000124 2 en vsd IEC10000124 V2 EN US Figure 123 Example for start level of the current variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 7 Curren...

Page 262: ...mplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function 7 10 7 5 Undervoltage protection GUID 96171DC7 9F8E 47B4 BE0D E1B9EE214612 v5 The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the lowest measured phase phase voltage quantity with the set start level The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level The start signal starts a de...

Page 263: ...erse time characteristics see tables 674 and 675 13 curve types See tables 674 and 675 Minimum operate time for inverse time characteristics 0 00 60 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater High voltage limit voltage dependent operation 30 0 100 0 of UBase 1 0 of Ur Start undervoltage 2 0 100 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Reset ratio undervoltage 105 Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0 Min 15 ms...

Page 264: ...258 ...

Page 265: ...ervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions The two step undervoltage protection function UV2PTUV can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as a long time delayed back up to the primary protection UV2PTUV has two voltage steps each with inverse or definite time delay It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close...

Page 266: ...Block of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 2 BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 PID 3586 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 141 UV2PTUV Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1 TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2 TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3 TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip ...

Page 267: ... curve type for step 1 OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 from step 1 U1 1 0 100 0 UB 0 1 70 0 Voltage setting start val DT IDMT in of UBase step 1 t1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Definitive time delay of step 1 t1Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 k1 0 05 1 10 0 01 0 05 Time multiplie...

Page 268: ...Values Range Unit Step Default Description tReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for step 1 tIReset1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 025 Time delay in IDMT reset s step 1 ACrv1 0 005 200 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable c...

Page 269: ...D 3586 MONITOREDDATA v6 Table 145 UV2PTUV Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description UL1 REAL kV Voltage in phase L1 UL2 REAL kV Voltage in phase L2 UL3 REAL kV Voltage in phase L3 8 1 7 Operation principle M15326 3 v9 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is used to detect low power system voltage If one two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value a corresponding START...

Page 270: ...percentage of the base voltage which is set in kV phase to phase voltage This means operation for phase to earth voltage under UBase kV 3 U EQUATION1429 V3 EN US Equation 36 and operation for phase to phase voltage under U UBase kV EQUATION1990 V1 EN US Equation 37 When the phase to earth voltage measurement is selected the function automatically introduces division of the base value by the square...

Page 271: ...be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon In the voltage interval Un down to Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 the used voltage will be Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that 0 100 CrvSatn B C EQUATION1435 V1 EN US Equation 41 The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integ...

Page 272: ...ime tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 pickup for the inverse time the corresponding start output is reset After leaving the hysteresis area the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area For the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fl...

Page 273: ...nstantaneous Measured Voltage tIReset1 IEC05000010 4 en vsd IEC05000010 V4 EN US Figure 128 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 8 Voltage protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 267 Technical manual ...

Page 274: ... inverse time delay at different reset types Definite timer delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 130 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 131 and figure 132 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured Section 8 1MRK 506 382 UEN A...

Page 275: ... US Figure 130 Logic diagram for step 1 DT operation U1 ST1 TR1 tReset1 t1 IEC10000039 3 en vsd IEC10000039 V3 EN US Figure 131 Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 8 Voltage protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 269 Technical manual ...

Page 276: ...reases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1 either the trip output of step 1 or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1 are blocked The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter This internal blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2 In case of disconnection of the high voltag...

Page 277: ...tages Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The voltages are individually compared to the set value and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is s...

Page 278: ...ge Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 UL1 UL2 UL3 TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR START IntBlkStVal1 t1Reset IntBlkStVal2 t2Reset IEC05000834 2 en vsd Comparator IEC05000834 V2 EN US Figure 134 Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 8 1 8 Technical data IP13001 1 v1 M13290 1 v15 Table 146 UV2PTUV technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage...

Page 279: ...ltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545 1 v3 8 2 1 Identification M17002 1 v8 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 3U SYMBOL C 2U SMALLER THAN V2 EN US 59 8 2 2 Functionality OV2PTOV M13798 3 v15 Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss tap changer...

Page 280: ...LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 1 BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 2 BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 PID 3535 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 148 OV2PTOV Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1 TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip...

Page 281: ...time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op 1 of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 from step 1 U1 1 0 200 0 UB 0 1 120 0 Voltage setting start val DT IDMT in of UBase step 1 t1 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 5 00 Definitive time delay of step 1 t1Min 0 000 60 ...

Page 282: ...01 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 BCrv1 0 50 100 00 0 01 1 00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 CCrv1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 DCrv1 0 000 60 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 PCrv1 0 000 3 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 CrvSa...

Page 283: ...PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays If one two or three phase voltages increase above the set value a corresponding START signal is issued OV2PTOV can be set to START TRIP based on 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages being above the set point If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period correspond...

Page 284: ...the set values U1 for Step 1 and U2 for Step 2 The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs Either 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal To avoid oscillations of the output START signal a hysteresis is included 8 2 7 2 Time delay M15330 10 v11 Th...

Page 285: ...ro the time delay will be infinity There will be an undesired discontinuity Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon In the voltage interval Un up to Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 the used voltage will be Un 1 0 CrvSatn 100 If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that 0 100 CrvSatn B C EQUATION1435 V1 EN US Equation 48 The highest phase or p...

Page 286: ... time the corresponding START output is reset after that the defined reset time has elapsed Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area The hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn where n means either 1 or 2 respectively to allow a high and a...

Page 287: ...1 Measured tIReset1 Linearly decreased IEC09000055 2 en vsd IEC09000055 V2 EN US Figure 137 Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1 and inverse time delay at different reset types 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 8 Voltage protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 281 Technical manual ...

Page 288: ...at different reset types Definite time delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 139 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 140 and figure 141 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s where n means either 1 or 2 respectively instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured Section ...

Page 289: ...ure 139 Logic diagram for step 1 definite time delay DT operation tReset1 U1 START TRIP t1 IEC10000037 2 en vsd IEC10000037 V2 EN US Figure 140 Example for step 1 Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 8 Voltage protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 283 Technical manual ...

Page 290: ...p 2 8 2 7 4 Design M15330 34 v8 The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase to earth voltages or the three phase to phase voltages Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals are used The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration A special logic is incl...

Page 291: ...tTypeCrv1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 UL1 UL2 UL3 TRIP TRIP OR OR OR OR OR OR IEC05000013 2 en vsd IEC05000013 WMF V2 EN US Figure 142 Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 8 2 8 Technical data IP13013 1 v1 M13304 1 v14 Table 153 OV2PTOV technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage step 1 and 2 1 0 200 0 of UBase 0 5 of U...

Page 292: ...sidual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV IP14546 1 v4 8 3 1 Identification SEMOD54295 2 v6 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 2 U0 IEC15000108 V1 EN US 59N 8 3 2 Functionality M13808 3 v11 Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults Two step residual overvoltage...

Page 293: ...OOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 1 BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal step 2 BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 PID 3531 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 155 ROV2PTOV Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1 TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2 START BOOLEAN General start signal ST1 BOOLEAN Common start si...

Page 294: ...ime Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog inv curve Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 2 U2 1 0 100 0 UB 0 1 45 0 Voltage setting start val DT IDMT step 2 in of UBase t2 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Definitive time delay of step 2 t2Min 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 k2 0 05 1 10 0 01 0 05 Time multiplier for the in...

Page 295: ...25 Time delay in IDMT reset s step 2 ACrv2 0 005 200 000 0 001 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 BCrv2 0 50 100 00 0 01 1 00 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 CCrv2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 DCrv2 0 000 60 000 0 001 0 000 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 PCrv2 0 000 3 000 0 001 1 000 ...

Page 296: ...inite time delay or inverse time delay The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage which is set in kV phase phase The set UBase value is divided by sqrt 3 before the set value is calculated 8 3 7 1 Measurement principle M15331 6 v6 The residual voltage is measured continuously and compared with the set values U1 and U2 To avoid oscillations of the output START signal a set...

Page 297: ... must be calculated so that 0 100 CrvSatn B C EQUATION1440 V1 EN US Equation 53 The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section Inverse characteristics TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode DT and by some special volta...

Page 298: ...the timer is reset instantaneously the timer value is frozen during the reset time or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time See figure 144 and figure 145 TRIP U1 TRIP t Time Time Integrator t Frozen Timer Instantaneous Voltage Voltage Time HystAbs1 START START tIReset1 Measured tIReset1 Linearly decreased IEC09000055 2 en vsd IEC09000055 V2 EN US Figure 144 Voltage profile no...

Page 299: ...or step 1 and inverse time delay Definite time delay When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 146 Detailed information about individual stage reset operation behavior is shown in figure 147 and figure 148 respectively Note that by setting tResetn 0 0s instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 8 Voltage prot...

Page 300: ...S Figure 146 Logic diagram for step 1 Definite time delay DT operation U1 ST1 TR1 tReset1 t1 IEC10000039 3 en vsd IEC10000039 V3 EN US Figure 147 Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset Section 8 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Voltage protection 294 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 301: ...related to step 1 BLKTR2 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 BLKST2 blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2 8 3 7 4 Design M15331 32 v7 The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency The residual voltage is compared to the set value and is also used for the inverse time characterist...

Page 302: ...ROV2PTOV technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate voltage step 1 step 2 1 0 200 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Absolute hysteresis 0 0 50 0 of UBase 0 5 of Ur at U Ur 0 5 of U at U Ur Inverse time characteristics for low and high step see table 684 See table 684 Definite time delay low step step 1 at 0 to 1 2 x Uset 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater Def...

Page 303: ...et time start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time start at 0 to 1 2 x Uset Min 20 ms Max 35 ms Reset time start at 1 2 x Uset to 0 Min 5 ms Max 25 ms Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset Impulse margin time 15 ms typically 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 8 Voltage protection Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 297 Technical manual ...

Page 304: ...298 ...

Page 305: ...schemes gas turbine startup and so on Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase phase or three phase neutral voltages to be connected For information about how to connect analog inputs refer to Application manual IED application Analog inputs...

Page 306: ...75 00 Hz 0 01 48 80 Frequency set value IntBlockLevel 0 0 100 0 UB 1 0 50 0 Internal blocking level in of UBase tDelay 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Operate time delay tReset 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Time delay for reset tRestore 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Restore time delay RestoreFreq 45 00 65 00 Hz 0 01 49 90 Restore frequency value TimerMode Definite timer Volt based timer Definite timer Settin...

Page 307: ...es below the setting IntBlockLevel SAPTUF gets blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase which should be set as a phase phase voltage in kV To avoid oscillations of the output START signal a hysteresis has been included 9 1 6 2 Time delay M13354 10 v9 The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable definite ...

Page 308: ... on low frequency In many applications the voltage level is very suitable and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage Therefore a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced to make sure that load shedding or other actions take place at the right location At constant voltage U the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 54 At non constant v...

Page 309: ...ed voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel both the START and the TRIP outputs are blocked 9 1 6 5 Design M13354 63 v10 The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults The time integrator can operate ...

Page 310: ...TUF technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value start function at symmetrical three phase voltage 35 00 75 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Operate time start at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz fn 50 Hz Min 80 ms Max 95 ms fn 60 Hz Min 65 ms Max 80 ms Reset time start at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz Min 15 ms Max 30 ms Operate time definite time function at fset 0 02 Hz to fset 0 02 Hz 0 000 60 000 s ...

Page 311: ...4953 3 v12 Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations where reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network Close to the generating plant generator governor problems can also cause over frequency SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy and is used mainly...

Page 312: ... v2 Table 167 SAPTOF Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal START BOOLEAN General start signal BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude FREQ REAL Measured frequency 9 2 5 Settings PID 6751 SETTINGS v2 Table 168 SAPTOF Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On StartFrequency 35 00 90 00 ...

Page 313: ... magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel SAPTOF is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase which should be set as a phase phase voltage in kV To avoid oscillations of the output START signal a hysteresis has been included 9 2 6 2 Time delay M14958 9 v8 The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time ...

Page 314: ...sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 154 Frequency f StartFrequency Voltage start TRIP U IntBlockLevel block BLOCK OR Definite time...

Page 315: ...ription IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Rate of change of frequency protection SAPFRC df dt SYMBOL N V1 EN US 81 9 3 2 Functionality M14965 3 v13 The rate of change of frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system SAPFRC measures frequency with high accuracy and can be used for generation shedding ...

Page 316: ...IGNALS v2 Table 172 SAPFRC Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal START BOOLEAN Start signal RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude 9 3 5 Settings PID 6754 SETTINGS v2 Table 173 SAPFRC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On StartFr...

Page 317: ...BlockLevel the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued If the frequency recovers after a frequency decrease a restore signal is issued 9 3 6 1 Measurement principle M14970 6 v8 The rate of change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously and compared with the set value StartFreqGrad Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent o...

Page 318: ... by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore 9 3 6 3 Blocking M14970 23 v6 Rate of change frequency protection SAPFRC can be partially or totally blocked by binary input signals or by parameter settings where BLOCK blocks the START and TRIP outputs BLKTRIP blocks the TRIP output BLKREST blocks the RESTORE output If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel both the START...

Page 319: ... diagram for SAPFRC 9 3 7 Technical data M14976 1 v9 Table 175 SAPFRC Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate value start function 10 00 10 00 Hz s 10 0 mHz s Operate value restore enable frequency 45 00 65 00 Hz 2 0 mHz Definite restore time delay 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 100 ms whichever is greater Definite time delay for frequency gradient trip 0 200 60 000 s 0 2 or 120 ms whicheve...

Page 320: ...314 ...

Page 321: ...rrent circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping 10 1 3 Function block...

Page 322: ...nOp 10 200 IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential level in of IBase Table 179 CCSSPVC Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Ip Block 20 500 IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase current in of IBase Table 180 CCSSPVC Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value...

Page 323: ...sts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND gate resets This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element s operate for example during a fault å IL1 IL2 IL3 Iref å å I IMinOp å x 0 8 AND BLOCK 1 5 x Ir 10 ms OPERATION 100 ms 1 s 150 ms 20 ms I Ip Block en05000463 tif FAIL ALA...

Page 324: ...acy Operate current 10 200 of IBase 10 0 of Ir at I Ir 10 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio Operate current 90 Block current 20 500 of IBase 5 0 of Ir at I Ir 5 0 of I at I Ir Reset ratio Block current 90 at 50 500 of IBase 10 2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556 1 v3 10 2 1 Identification M14869 1 v4 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device numb...

Page 325: ...ded for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to take into account the particular earthing of the network A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to det...

Page 326: ...General start of function 3PH BOOLEAN Three phase start of function DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current phase L1 STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current phase L2 STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal o...

Page 327: ...ff On DU 1 100 UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage in of UBase DI 1 100 IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current in of IBase UPh 1 100 UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in of UBase IPh 1 100 IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in of IBase SealIn Off On On Seal in functionality Off On USealln 1 100 UB 1 70 Operate level of seal in phase voltage in of UBase IDLD 1 100 IB...

Page 328: ... 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2 The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0 and 3I0 3U2 and 3I2 The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0 and the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0 The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured ...

Page 329: ...sent The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off The IED is in TEST status TEST ACTIVE is high and the function has been blocked from the HMI BlockFUSE Yes The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to...

Page 330: ...ed by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection If DISCPOS 0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS 1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functi...

Page 331: ...e DUDI detections of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the level high then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three phases are lower then the setting Uph In addition to fuse failure detection two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm The internal signals DelatU ...

Page 332: ... a b a b UL3 IL3 a b a b AND AND OR OR AND AND FuseFailDetDUDI DUDI Detection DeltaIL1 DeltaUL1 DeltaIL2 DeltaUL2 DeltaIL3 DeltaUL3 IEC12000166 3 en vsd IL1 DI detection based on sample analysis DU detection based on sample analysis UL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 IL2 IL1 IL2 IL3 OR IEC12000166 V3 EN US Figure 162 Simplified logic diagram for the DU DI detection part Section 10 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Secondary system...

Page 333: ... 7 3 Dead line detection M13679 44 v4 A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 164 A dead phase condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD and IDLD If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated If all three phases are considered to b...

Page 334: ...ferent operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms The different operation modes are Off The negative and zero sequence function is switched off UNsINs Negative sequence is selected UZsIZs Zero sequence is selected UZsIZs OR UNsINs Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel OR condition for operation UZsIZs AND UNsINs Both negative and zero sequence ...

Page 335: ...sent before the shut down All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn before fuse failure is de activated and resets the signals BLKU BLKZ and 3PH The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting USealIn for more than 60 seconds the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the set value 3U0 and 3U2 for more than 5 seconds all phase currents...

Page 336: ... CurrZeroSeq CurrNegSeq a b a b OR AND AND AND FuseFailDetDUDI AND OpDUDI On DeadLineDet1Ph OR OR OR OR AND VoltZeroSeq VoltNegSeq t 5 s AllCurrLow t 150 ms intBlock Fuse failure detection Main logic BLKTRIP AND t 100 ms OR t 20 ms OR IEC10000033 2 en vsd OR FusefailStarted IEC10000033 V2 EN US Figure 165 Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function Main logic Section 10 1MRK 506...

Page 337: ...age change level 1 100 of UBase 10 0 of Ur Operate current change level 1 100 of IBase 10 0 of Ir Operate phase voltage 1 100 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Operate phase current 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of Ir Operate phase dead line voltage 1 100 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Operate phase dead line current 1 100 of IBase 0 5 of Ir Operate time start 1 ph at 1 x Ur to 0 Min 10 ms Max 25 ms Reset time start 1 ph at 0 to 1 x U...

Page 338: ...332 ...

Page 339: ...with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely SESRSYN function includes a built in voltage selection scheme for double bus and 1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings For systems which can run asynchronously a synchronizing feature is also provided The main purpose of ...

Page 340: ...046 1 en vsd IEC10000046 V1 EN US Figure 166 SESRSYN function block 11 1 4 Signals PID 6724 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 188 SESRSYN Input signals Name Type Default Description U3PBB1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1 busbar 1 U3PBB2 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1 busbar 2 U3PLN1 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1 line ...

Page 341: ...r OK ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic...

Page 342: ...OKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation INADVCLS BOOLEAN In...

Page 343: ...0 Breaker closing pulse duration tMaxSynch 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 600 00 Resets synch if no close has been made before set time tMinSynch 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions OperationSC Off On On Operation for synchronism check function Off On UHighBusSC 50 0 120 0 UBB 1 0 80 0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in of UBaseBus UHighLineSC 50 0 120 0 UBL 1 0...

Page 344: ...B 1 0 115 0 Maximum voltage for energizing in of UBase Line and or Bus tAutoEnerg 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Time delay for automatic energizing check tManEnerg 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Time delay for manual energizing check Table 191 SESRSYN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Phase L1L2 Phase L2L3 Phase L3L1 Positive ...

Page 345: ...ed line voltage 11 1 6 Monitored data PID 6724 MONITOREDDATA v1 Table 193 SESRSYN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p u of set voltage base value FRDIFFME REAL Hz Calculated difference of frequency PHDIFFME REAL deg Calculated difference of phase angle UBUS REAL kV Bus voltage ULINE REAL kV Line voltage 11 1 7 Operation principl...

Page 346: ...ability to make the necessary voltage selection For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors For 1 circuit breaker arrangements correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the i...

Page 347: ...puts MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions UOKSC shows that the voltages are high UDIFFSC FRDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFA PHDIFFM shows when the voltage dif...

Page 348: ...age with the set values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages are both live Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for UDiffSynch which is a p u value of set voltage base values If both sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable the measured values are compared with the ...

Page 349: ...alue with CloseAngleMax 30 degrees max value SlipFrequency Hz BusFrequency LineFrequency 0 040 0 080 1 000 0 050 0 100 0 800 0 080 0 160 0 500 0 200 0 400 0 200 0 400 0 810 0 100 1 000 0 080 0 800 0 050 1 000 0 040 At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within th...

Page 350: ... or dead This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for line energizing The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than 5Hz The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions r...

Page 351: ...block of the Energizing check function TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output fBus and fLine 5 Hz ManEnerg OR AND OR t tManEnerg AND AND UMaxEnerg MANENOK TSTENOK selectedFuseOK OR BLOCK BLKENERG TSTENERG IEC14000031 1 en vsd OR manEnergOpenBays ManEnergDBDL AND UHighBusEnerg ULowLineEnerg AND ULowBusEnerg UHighLineEnerg A...

Page 352: ...030 1 en vsd BOTH IEC14000030 V1 EN US Figure 170 Automatic energizing ManEnerg CBConfig AND AND AND AND AND AND B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN LN1QOPEN LN2QOPEN B2QCLD OR OR OR OR BLKENERG BLOCK AND AND AND 1 bus CB 1 bus alt CB Tie CB OR AND manEnergOpenBays IEC14000032 1 en vsd IEC14000032 V1 EN US Figure 171 Open bays Section 11 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Control 346 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Te...

Page 353: ...priate Line and Bus voltages and MCB supervision The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig If No voltage sel is set the voltages used will be U Line1 and U Bus1 This setting is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse ...

Page 354: ...ages have a VT failure This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK The function logic diagram is shown in figure 172 AND AND AND bus1Voltage OR OR OR ULN1FF ULN1OK UB1FF UB1OK UB2FF UB2OK B2QCLD B2QOPEN B1QCLD B1QOPEN BLOCK bus2Voltage AND 1 B2SEL B1SEL AND AND AND USELFAIL en05000779 2 vsd OR invalidSelection busVoltage selectedFuseOK IEC05000779 V2 EN US Figure...

Page 355: ... what is available from each fuse MCB The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage Four different output combinations are possible bus to bus bus to line line to bus and line to line The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 d...

Page 356: ...2SEL OR AND B2SEL AND AND AND en05000780 2 vsd OR OR line2Voltage bus2Voltage line1Voltage invalidSelection lineVoltage selectedFuseOK IEC05000780 V2 EN US Figure 173 Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1 2 breaker arrangement Section 11 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Control 350 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 357: ...D B2QOPEN LN2QCLD LN2QOPEN bus2Voltage LN2SEL AND AND 1 B2SEL line2Voltage OR en05000781 2 vsd OR OR busVoltage invalidSelection lineVoltage selectedFuseOK IEC05000781 V2 EN US Figure 174 Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1 2 breaker arrangement 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 11 Control Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 351 Technical man...

Page 358: ...rence minimum limit for synchronizing 0 003 0 250 Hz 2 5 mHz Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing 0 050 1 000 Hz 2 5 mHz Maximum allowed frequency rate of change 0 000 0 500 Hz s 10 0 mHz s Maximum closing angle between bus and line for synchronizing 15 30 degrees 2 0 degrees Breaker closing pulse duration 0 050 1 000 s 0 2 or 15 ms whichever is greater tMaxSynch which resets synch...

Page 359: ...7 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Autorecloser for 1 phase 2 phase and or 3 phase SMBRREC 5 0 1 IEC15000204 V1 EN US 79 11 2 2 Functionality M12390 3 v16 The auto reclosing function provides high speed and or delayed auto reclosing single and or three phase auto reclosing support for single or multi breaker applications The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar restoration Up t...

Page 360: ...ck 11 2 4 Signals PID 6796 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 196 SMBRREC Input signals Name Type Default Description ON BOOLEAN 0 Switch AR On at ExternalCtrl On OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switch AR Off at ExternalCtrl On BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Set AR in blocked state BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Release AR from blocked state RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset AR to initial conditions INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupt and inhibit reclosing sequence START BOOL...

Page 361: ...s unsuccessful INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing in progress inactive during reclaim time 1PT1 BOOLEAN Single phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1 2PT1 BOOLEAN Two phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1 3PT1 BOOLEAN Three phase reclosing is in progress for shot 1 3PT2 BOOLEAN Three phase reclosing is in progress for shot 2 3PT3 BOOLEAN Three phase reclosing is in progress for shot 3 3PT4 BOOLEAN T...

Page 362: ...3ph 1 2 3ph AR mode selection t1 1Ph 0 000 120 000 s 0 001 1 000 Dead time for shot 1 single phase reclosing t1 3Ph 0 000 120 000 s 0 001 6 000 Dead time for shot 1 delayed three phase reclosing with synchrocheck conditions t1 3PhHS 0 000 120 000 s 0 001 0 400 Dead time for shot 1 high speed three phase reclosing tReclaim 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 60 00 Reclaim time tSync 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 30 00 Maxim...

Page 363: ...4 3Ph 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 30 00 Dead time for shot 4 three phase reclosing t5 3Ph 0 00 6000 00 s 0 01 30 00 Dead time for shot 5 three phase reclosing Extended t1 Off On Off Extend dead time at loss of permissive channel tExtended t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 500 Extend three phase dead time duration tInhibit 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 5 000 Reset time for reclosing inhibit CutPulse Off On Off Shorten circ...

Page 364: ...eived high speed shot is generally used for an application where the dead time is less than 1 second and synchrocheck is not required delayed auto reclosing is generally regarded as an application where the dead time is greater than 1 second and where typically synchrocheck is required sequence is the auto reclosing cycle beginning with start and ending with successful unsuccessful or aborted recl...

Page 365: ... GUID D838C380 C74B 498C 82D6 3364E2F6BA22 v1 The auto recloser is in reclaim time status while the following conditions are fulfilled the reclaim time has not yet expired the status is not interrupted by either a new start signal or a block signal A new start signal during reclaim time status forces the function to proceed to next shot and change state into in progress status as long as the last ...

Page 366: ...Description of the status transition carefully The logic for most of the explained inputs outputs settings and internal signals described in this chapter is shown in Figure 181 Other figures mentioned are in some way connected or cooperate with Figure 181 Before going into details in the following chapters the short functional feature summary is given below The auto reclosing function is multi sho...

Page 367: ...e switched Off or On with a setting or by external control inputs With the setting Operation On the auto recloser is activated and with the setting Operation Off it is deactivated With the settings Operation On and ExternalCtrl On the activation and deactivation is made by signal pulses to the ON and OFF inputs for example from a control system or by a control switch If the input conditions CBCLOS...

Page 368: ... setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer for example from function block B16I to the MODEINT input The six possible modes are described in Table 201 below with their corresponding MODEINT integer value When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected setting ARMode will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead The selected mode is reported as...

Page 369: ...ings for single two and three phase dead times t1 1Ph t1 2Ph and t1 3Ph If only the START input signal is applied and an auto reclosing program with single phase reclosing is selected the auto reclosing dead time t1 1Ph will be used If one of the TR2P or TR3P inputs is activated in in parallel with the START input the auto reclosing dead time for either two phase or three phase auto reclosing is u...

Page 370: ...ange from ready status to in progress status When the dead time has expired the close command is issued and the reclaim time is started and the in progress status will change to reclaim time status The usual way to start a reclosing sequence is to start it when a selective line protection tripping has occurred by applying a signal to the START input If the auto reclosing mode with only three phase...

Page 371: ...nditions The TRSOTF trip by switch onto fault input starts shots 2 to 5 It may be connected to the switch onto fault output of line protection if multi shot auto reclosing is used In normal circumstances the auto recloser is started with a protection trip command which resets quickly due to fault clearing In case the start signal lasts for a too long time the user can set a maximum start pulse dur...

Page 372: ... IEC16000156 V1 EN US Figure 179 Automatic proceeding of shots Blocking resetting and inhibiting auto reclosing GUID 82719FE0 02E4 48FB 9685 2146480F3653 v1 The BLKON input is used to block the auto recloser for example when certain special service conditions arise The auto recloser can also be blocked by an unsuccessful reclosing attempt This is controlled by the setting BlockByUnsucCl When the a...

Page 373: ...functionality described above is described in Table 202 and Table 203 below Table 202 BLKON BLKOFF RESET INHIBIT and SYNC behavior when the function is in ready status Output Input READY ACTIVE BLOCKED INHIBOUT ABORTED SYNCFAIL None of below inputs activated True False False False False False BLKON pulse False False True False False False BLKOFF pulse True False False False False False RESET pulse...

Page 374: ... type CBReadyType OCO circuit breaker ready for an Open Close Open sequence this condition may not be fulfilled during the dead time and at the moment of auto reclosure The Open Close Open condition was however checked at the start of the auto reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the circuit breaker is prepared for a Close Open sequence The reclaim timer tReclaim is started each time a circu...

Page 375: ...B OR AND AND S R t tSuccessful count0 SUCCL IEC16000157 V1 EN US Figure 180 Successful Unsuccessful Figure 181 shows the logic for most parts of an auto reclosing sequence Figure 181 should be read together with the other logic diagrams to get the whole picture 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 11 Control Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 369 Technical manual ...

Page 376: ... tInhibit OR CB readiness check AND CBReadyType OR CutPulse AND OR OR tPulse 50ms AND Follow CB cbClosed inhibitWaitForMaster longStartInhibit INPROGR 2PT1 1PT1 3PT1 3PT2 3PT3 3PT4 3PT5 inProgress reclaimTimeStarted inhibitThermalStart inhibit PREP3P INHIBOUT INHIBIT BLKOFF BLKON RESET RSTCOUNT SYNC SKIPHS CBReady ZONESTEP synchroCheckOK t1 3PhHS t13PhExtTimeout Dead time settings extendTime slave...

Page 377: ...e table Mapping from IEC 61850 Ed2 standard is also shown for the AutoRecSt data object Table 204 Auto reclosing status reported by IEC 61850 in priority order Data object AutoRecSt value Description for mapped signals Mapped output signals Comments Description in IEC61850 Ed2 1 Ready READY Ready 2 In Progress INPROGR In Progress 3 Successful SUCCL Successful 4 Waiting for trip 5 Trip issued by pr...

Page 378: ...s initiated then actually normal three phase shot one with dead time t1 3Ph will be started The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers and down stream auto reclosers is needed If function is in ready status and this input is activated the auto recloser increases its actual shot number by one and enters directly the reclaim time status for shot one If a start is recei...

Page 379: ...o continue the reclosing sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime The reason for shortening the time for the normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime is to give the slave permission to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets The mimimum settable time for tSlaveDeadTime is 0 1sec because both master and slave should not send the breaker closing command at the same time The slave...

Page 380: ...ity by just setting the High and the Low priorities without changing the configuration The CBCLOSED inputs from each circuit breaker are important in multi breaker arrangements to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed at the beginning of the sequence If the High priority breaker was not closed its auto reclosing sequence will not start and the low priority breaker will just continue its auto ...

Page 381: ...le phase fault single phase reclosing CBREADY Fault UNSUCCL ACTIVE 3PT2 3PT1 INPROGR READY SYNC TR3P START CBCLOSED Closed Time IEC04000197 3 en vsd PREP3P CLOSECB Open C Open C t1 3Ph tPulse t2 3Ph tPulse tReclaim IEC04000197 V3 EN US Figure 185 Permanent fault three phase trip two shot reclosing 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 11 Control Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 375 Technical manual ...

Page 382: ...LOSED IEC04000198 3 en vsd PREP3P CLOSECB t1 1Ph tReclaim IEC04000198 V3 EN US Figure 186 Permanent single phase fault single phase trip single shot reclosing ARMode 1 2 3ph Section 11 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Control 376 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 383: ...0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Extend three phase dead time duration tExtended t1 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is allowed tCBClosedMin 0 00 6000 00 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichever is greater Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has reset tSlaveDeadTime 0 100 60 000 s 0 2 or 35 ms whichev...

Page 384: ...6000 00 s 0 2 or 45 ms whichever is greater 11 3 Interlocking IP15572 1 v2 11 3 1 Logical node for interlocking SCILO IP14138 1 v2 11 3 1 1 Identification GUID 3EC5D7F1 FDA0 4F0E 9391 08D357689E0C v3 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Logical node for interlocking SCILO 3 11 3 1 2 Functionality M15048 3 v6 The Logical node for inter...

Page 385: ... respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled That means also if the switch has a defined end position for example open then the appropriate enable signal in this case EN_OPEN is false The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function The position inputs come from th...

Page 386: ...The apparatus control function APC10 for up to 10 apparatuses is used for control and supervision of circuit breakers disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking synchrocheck operator place selection and external or internal blockings Apparatus control features Select Execute principle to g...

Page 387: ...nnectors and earthing switches and supervises the switching operation and positions 11 4 2 Operation principle M13423 4 v8 A bay can handle for example a power line a transformer a reactor or a capacitor bank The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences Because a primary apparatu...

Page 388: ...2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used The values are available in the command response to commands from IE C61850 8 1 clients An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller SCSWI and Circuit breaker SXCBR indicates the value of the cause during the latest command if the function specific command evaluation ha...

Page 389: ... aborted due to cancel service X 16 Time limit over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit X 17 Abortion by trip Control action is aborted due to a trip PTRC with ACT general TRUE X 18 Object not selected Control action is rejected because control object was not selected X 19 Object already selected Select action is not executed because the addressed object is already select...

Page 390: ...61850 8 1 Name Ed 2 Ed 1 0 25 0 None 1 1 1 Not supported 2 2 2 Blocked by switching hierarchy 3 3 3 Select failed 4 4 4 Invalid position 5 5 5 Position reached 6 6 6 Parameter change in execution 7 7 7 Step limit 8 8 8 Blocked by Mode 9 9 9 Blocked by process 10 10 10 Blocked by interlocking 11 11 11 Blocked by synchrocheck 12 12 12 Command already in execution 13 13 13 Blocked by health 14 14 14 ...

Page 391: ...ct or cancel service is rejected because control action is already running 13 Blocked by health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that prevents a successful operation Health 16 Time limit over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit 18 Object not selected Control action is rejected because control object was not selected 19 Object already selected Select ac...

Page 392: ... 0 External Local Remote switch is in Off position LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local Remote switch is in Local position LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local Remote switch is in Remote position LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L R switch position is valid BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command PID 4086 OUTPUTSIGNALS v8 Table...

Page 393: ... remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED level The local remote switch is also on the control protection IED itself which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally not via I O boards When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I O boards When the local panel switch or ...

Page 394: ...itch positions AllPSTOValid setting RemoteInc Station setting LocSta CtlVal command PSTO value LED indications on LHMI Possible locations that shall be able to operate 0 Off 0 Remote and Local Off Not possible to operate 1 Local Priority 1 Remote Off Local On Local Panel 1 Local No priority 5 Remote and Local On Local Station or Remote level without any priority 2 Remote Priority No TRUE 6 Remote ...

Page 395: ...cal HMI or from an external local remote switch are connected via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function block The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs 11 4 5 1 Function block M17088 3 v3 LOCREM CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL L...

Page 396: ...2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2 PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3 PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4 PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8 PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9 PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input ch...

Page 397: ...settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ControlMode Internal LR switch External LR switch Internal LR switch Control mode for internal external LR switch PID 3943 SETTINGS v2 11 4 5 4 Operation principle M17087 3 v8 The function block Local remote LOCREM handles the signals coming from the local remote switch The connections are seen in Figure 193 where the inputs on functio...

Page 398: ...for several bays the local remote position can be different for the included bays When the local HMI is used the position of the local remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI The function block Local remote control LOCREMCTRL controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local remote position to applicable bay and screen ...

Page 399: ...I Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local automation function AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local automation function BL_CMD BOOLEAN ...

Page 400: ...ndication during command POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position XEXINF GROUP SIGNAL Execution information to XCBR XSWI XLNPROXY GUID 7DABB496 EABE 48A4 8078 7ED5D6D4FE14 v2 AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as e g for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI function They work without regard to how the operator place selector PSTO is set In ord...

Page 401: ...to get the signal synchronizing in progress tExecutionFB 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 30 00 Maximum time from command execution to termination tPoleDiscord 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 2 000 Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles SuppressMidPos Off On On Mid position is suppressed during time tIntermediate tIntermediate is set on each connected XCBR XSWI function individually InterlockChk Sel Op phase O...

Page 402: ...Ack AddCause 0 SEL_CL TRUE SELECTED TRUE selectAck AddCause 0 POSITION 00 timeStamp POSITION 10 timeStamp cmdTermination AddCause 0 RES_GRT FALSE operateAck AddCause 0 requestedPosition 10 opRcvd TRUE opOK TRUE tOpOk POSITION 00 timeStamp POSITION 10 timeStamp select RES_RQ FALSE cmdTermination AddCause 0 SELECTED FALSE SEL_CL FALSE tSelect tReservation Response tExecutionFB RES_RQ TRUE IEC1600008...

Page 403: ...read from the function block and used for example at commissioning There is no relation between the command direction and the actual position For example if the switch is in closed position it is possible to execute a close command Before an execution command an evaluation of the position is done If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no exe...

Page 404: ...cuit breaker SXCBR At error the cause value with highest priority is shown Blocking principles M13484 37 v5 The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function QCBAY and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place The different blocking possibilities are Block deblock of command It is used to block command for operation of position Blocking of function BLOCK If the B...

Page 405: ...rom the synchrocheck function SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function which will send the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled see Figure 197 If no synchronizing function is included the timer for supervision of the synchronizing in progress signal is set to 0 which means no start of the synchronizing function SCSWI will then set th...

Page 406: ...een issued If an operation is issued after the time out the negative response is Object not selected The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation that is the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function select tResResponse timer reservation granted RES_GRT t1 tResResponse then ...

Page 407: ...he parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true If SYNC_OK true at the time the execute command signal is received the timer tSynchrocheck will not start The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum ...

Page 408: ...xpression for distributing the cause of failure over GOOSE the XLNPROXY function is used for evaluating the causes normally evaluated by the SXCBR function Further in some cases selection may also be used on the model of the switch in the breaker IED in case multiple controllers may access it via GOOSE In such a case if the input for the stSeld data attribute in the XLNPROXY function is connected ...

Page 409: ... Pos stVal 00 Pos t Pos stVal 10 Pos t SELECTED FALSE Pos stSeld FALSE XCBR IEC16000084 1 en Original vsdx IEC16000084 V1 EN US Figure 202 Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the control model SBO with enhanced security is used and selection is used for the XCBR in the breaker IED 11 4 7 Circuit breaker SXCBR IP15614 1 v3 11 4 7 1 Functionality M13489 3 v6 The purpose o...

Page 410: ...d to immediately close the switch BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I O CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 None 2 O 3 CO 4...

Page 411: ... Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description tStartMove 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command tIntermediate 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Allowed time for intermediate position AdaptivePulse Not adaptive Adaptive Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end position is reached tOpenPulse 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 200 Outpu...

Page 412: ...signal is set to TRUE all commands for change of position are rejected even trip commands from protection functions are rejected The functionality of the local remote switch is described in Figure 204 From I O switchLR TRUE FALSE Local Operation at switch yard level Remote Operation at IED or higher level en05000096 vsd IEC05000096 V1 EN US Figure 204 Local Remote switch Blocking principles M13487...

Page 413: ...date when the substitution is released the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value but the quality is changed to questionable old data indicating that the value is old and not reliable When the position of the SXCBR is substituted its IEC 61850 8 1 data object is marked as substituted in addition to the substituted quality but the position quality of the connected SCSWI is n...

Page 414: ...e output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse Figure 206 shows the principle of the execute output pulse The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses EXE_CL CLOSEPOS EXE_CL OPENPOS AdaptivePulse FALSE tClosePulse tClosePulse AdaptivePulse TRUE en05000...

Page 415: ...ases with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed If the start position indicates bad state OPENPOS 1 and CLOSEPOS 1 when a command is e...

Page 416: ...LK BLK_VAL STSELD STSELD_V OPRCVD OPRCVD_V OPOK OPOK_VAL EEHEALTH EEH_VAL OPCAP OPCAP_V COMMVALID XIN XPOS SELECTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE EEHEALTH OPCAP IEC16000043 1 en vsdx IEC16000043 V1 EN US Figure 208 XLNPROXY function block 11 4 8 3 Signals PID 6712 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 226 XLNPROXY Input signals Name Type Default Description BEH INTEGER 1 Behaviour BEH_VLD BOOLE...

Page 417: ...LD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on EEHEALTH input OPCAP INTEGER 1 Operating capability OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCAP input COMMVALID BOOLEAN 0 Communication valid XIN GROUP SIGNAL Execution information from CSWI PID 6712 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 227 XLNPROXY Output signals Name Type Description XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled OP_BLKD BOOL...

Page 418: ...the same format as used from SXCBR to SCSWI It makes a similar evaluation of the command response as SXCBR when a command is issued from the connected SCSWI 11 4 8 6 Position supervision GUID 95C72346 A577 4F0A 8584 8E1593B9B947 v1 XLNPROXY has two outputs for position indication OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS Position is a double point indication and the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are binary outputs intended to ...

Page 419: ...ible cause values from XLNPROXY Cause No Cause Description Conditions 8 Blocked by Mode The BEH input is 5 2 Blocked by switching hierarchy The LOC input indicates that only local commands are allowed for the breaker IED function 24 Blocked for open cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is blocked for open commands 25 Blocked for close cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the swi...

Page 420: ...t of XLNPROXY before accepting selection this information is transferred to the SCSWI function from the XLNPROXY through the group connection XPOS If STSELD is not activated within tSelect of the SCSWI function the selection is deemed failed and it gives a negative selection acknowledgement to the command issuer with the cause Select failed Further if the communication is lost or the data received...

Page 421: ...7 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 SWPOSN IEC14000005 1 en vsd IEC14000005 V1 EN US Figure 209 SLGAPC function block 11 5 4 Signals PID 6641 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 230 SLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary UP command DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary DOWN command 1MRK 506 382 UE...

Page 422: ...Selector switch position 15 P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16 P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17 P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18 P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19 P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20 P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21 P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22 P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23 P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24 P25 BOOLEAN ...

Page 423: ...received on the DOWN input the function will activate the output next to the present activated output in descending order for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed In case of steady signals the output will be active till the time it receives ne...

Page 424: ...he monitoring the switches will be listed with their actual position names as defined by the user max 13 characters if it is used for control the switches will be listed with their actual positions but only the first three letters of the name will be used In both cases the switch full name will be shown but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor under the Caption If...

Page 425: ... Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language O Select switch Press the I or O key A dialog box appears The pos will not be modified outputs will not be activated until you press the Enter button for O K IEC06000421 V3 EN US Figure 210 Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI From the single line diagram on local HMI 11 6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754 1 v3 11 6 1 Ide...

Page 426: ...4 VSGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input PID 6504 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 235 VSGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked POSITION INTEGER Position indicat...

Page 427: ...1850 and distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen It is important for indication in the SL...

Page 428: ...identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC 11 7 2 Functionality SEMOD55850 5 v7 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is used to send double point position indications to other systems equipment or functions in the substation through IEC 61850 8 1 or other communi...

Page 429: ...ock in which systems equipment or functions should receive this information More specifically DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication output POSITION by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE together with the logical input signal VALID When the input signal VALID is active the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs determine the two...

Page 430: ...unction block is a collection of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs or putting IED in ChangeLock state from remote In this way simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs without confirmation Confirmation status of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks The...

Page 431: ...escription Operation Off On Off Operation Off On PulseMode1 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 1 tPulse1 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 1 PulseMode2 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 2 tPulse2 0 01 6000 00 s 0 01 0 10 Pulse time output 2 PulseMode3 Pulsed Latched Pulsed Setting for pulsed latched mode for output 3 tPulse3 0 0...

Page 432: ...gnal will be pulsed and how long the pulse is or latched steady BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is sent no output will be activated PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions Although PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places only REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function 11 9 AutomationBits command function fo...

Page 433: ...BIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32 IEC09000925 V1 EN US Figure 214 AUTOBITS function block 11 9 4 Signals PID 3776 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 243 AUTOBITS Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection PID 3776 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 244 AUTOBITS Output signals Name Type Description CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1 CMDBIT2 B...

Page 434: ...ut bit 19 CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20 CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21 CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22 CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23 CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24 CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25 CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26 CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27 CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28 CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29 CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out b...

Page 435: ...ike an overriding the function still receives data from the DNP3 master Upon deactivation of BLOCK all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again momentarily For AUTOBITS the PSTO input determines the operator place The command can be written to the block while in Remote If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs 11 10 Single command 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD11...

Page 436: ...and output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN...

Page 437: ...ers in PCM600 The output signals can be of the types Off Steady or Pulse This configuration setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block The length of the output pulses are 100 ms In steady mode SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the ou...

Page 438: ...432 ...

Page 439: ...all line faults scheme communication logic is provided All types of communication schemes for permissive underreaching permissive overreaching blocking delta based blocking unblocking and intertrip are available The built in communication module LDCM can be used for scheme communication signaling when included 12 1 3 Function block M13866 3 v7 ZCPSCH I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKCS CSBLK CACC CSOR CSUR ...

Page 440: ...n zone signal CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open PID 3766 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 250 ZCPSCH Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send sig...

Page 441: ...UB for fault inception detection Delta3I0 0 200 IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in of IBase Delta3U0 0 100 UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in of UBase tSecurity 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection Table 253 ZCPSCH Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSelector 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Globa...

Page 442: ...1 6 2 Delta blocking scheme GUID 22E3BFAC 82E9 4434 B761 AD63BCFC68D5 v2 In order to avoid delays due to carrier coordination times the initiation of sending of blocking signal to remote end is done by a fault inception detection element based on delta quantities of currents and voltages The delta based fault detection is very fast and if the channel is fast there is no need for delaying the opera...

Page 443: ...table timer tCoord elapses to prevent a false trip see Figure 218 The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK block of trip by activating the input BLKTR block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS CACC CR tCoord TRIP AND t en05000512 vsd IEC05000512 V1 EN US Figure 218 Basic logic for trip signal in delta blocking scheme Channels for communication in each direction m...

Page 444: ... blocked by activating the input BLKCS e 12 1 6 5 Unblocking scheme M13893 31 v8 In unblocking scheme the lower dependability of a permissive scheme is overcome by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a receive signal It is common or suitable to use the function when older less reliable power line carrier PLC communication is used The unblocking functio...

Page 445: ...e trip logic There will not be any information in case of communication failure LCG Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored It sends a defined 150 ms CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes 200 ms there will not be recurrent signalling 12 1 6 6 Inter...

Page 446: ... NoRestart Unblock Off CSUR BLOCK CSBLK CRL BLKCS CSOR CACC CS TRIP t 25 ms tCoord tSendMin tSendMi n SchemeType Blocking Schemetype Permissive OR Schemetype Permissive UR SchemeType Intertrip t OR AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND OR OR AND AND t OR OR OR OR OR IEC05000515 V2 EN US Figure 223 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection simplified logic diagram Section ...

Page 447: ...Restart 12 2 Current reversal and Weak end infeed logic for distance protection 3 phase ZCRWPSCH IP15751 1 v4 12 2 1 Identification M15073 1 v5 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Current reversal and weak end infeed logic for distance protection 3 phase ZCRWPSCH 85 12 2 2 Functionality M13896 3 v15 The ZCRWPSCH function provides the...

Page 448: ...RV WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 VTSZ CBOPEN CRL IRVL TRWEI TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 TRWEIL3 ECHO IEC06000287 V2 EN US Figure 224 ZCRWPSCH function block 12 2 4 Signals PID 3521 INPUTSIGNALS v8 Table 255 ZCRWPSCH Input signals Name Type Default Description U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of curr...

Page 449: ... 060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local trip WEI Off Echo Echo Trip Off Operating mode of WEI logic tPickUpWEI 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 010 Coordination time for the WEI logic UPP 10 90 UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault condition UPN 10 90 UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault condition Table 258 ZCRWPSCH Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit...

Page 450: ... to zero 12 2 6 2 Weak end infeed logic M16679 8 v11 The weak end infeed logic WEI function sends back echoes the received signal under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements distance protection in forward or reverse direction The WEI function returns the received signal shown in Figure 226 when The setting parameter WEI is set to either...

Page 451: ...tripping criteria when the tripping of the local breaker is selected setting WEI Echo Trip With this setting the Echo and Trip are working in parallel as in logic shown in Figure 227 BLOCK VTSZ WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 CRL OR t tPickUpWEI t 200 ms AND CBOPEN t 1500 ms OR AND OR t 50 ms t 200 ms WEI Echo Trip ECHO AND AND UPN U3P AND AND t 100 ms OR OR OR OR AND AND t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms TRWEIL1 TRWEIL2 T...

Page 452: ...fication IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 12 3 2 Functionality M13823 3 v7 To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line when no communication channel is available local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH can be used This logic enables fast fault clearing and re closing during certain conditions but naturally it can not fully replace a commun...

Page 453: ... TRLL BOOLEAN Trip by loss of load 12 3 5 Settings PID 3511 SETTINGS v7 Table 262 ZCLCPSCH Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On LoadCurr 1 100 IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in of IBase LossOfLoad Off On Off Enable Disable operation of Loss of load ZoneExtension Off On Off Enable Disable operation of Zone extension MinC...

Page 454: ...gnal and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range an unwanted autoreclosing cycle will occur The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed On the other hand at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zo...

Page 455: ...ng signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal closing M13819 14 v2 12 4 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH IP14711 1 v2 12 4 1 Identification M14882 1 v2 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH 85 12 4 2 F...

Page 456: ...L LCG IEC06000288 V2 EN US Figure 231 ECPSCH function block 12 4 4 Signals PID 3581 INPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 264 ECPSCH Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier ...

Page 457: ...pe Mode of Operation tCoord 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 035 Communication scheme coordination time tSendMin 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal Table 267 ECPSCH Group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Unblock Off NoRestart Restart Off Operation mode of unblocking logic tSecurity 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 035 Security timer for loss of carrie...

Page 458: ...me delay normally 30 40 ms depends on the communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel carrier frequency is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero and positive sequence source impedances the channel can be shared with the impedance measuring system if that system also works in ...

Page 459: ... channels only if the ratio Z1S Z0S positive through zero sequence source impedance is about equal at both ends If the ratio is different the impedance measuring and the directional earth fault current system of the healthy line may detect a fault in different directions which could result in unwanted tripping Common channels cannot be used when the weak end infeed function is used in the distance...

Page 460: ...s common or suitable to use the function when older less reliable power line carrier PLC communication is used The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG which must always be present even when no CR signal is received The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal see figure 233 This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the l...

Page 461: ... activate LCG output in case of communication failure If the communication failure comes and goes 200 ms there will not be recurrent signaling 12 4 7 Technical data M16049 1 v10 Table 268 ECPSCH technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Scheme type Permissive Underreaching Permissive Overreaching Blocking Communication scheme coordination time 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater...

Page 462: ...a total loss of interconnection between the two buses To avoid this type of disturbance a fault current reversal logic transient blocking logic can be used M13928 8 v5 Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current out from t...

Page 463: ...cription IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic ECHO BOOLEAN Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in case of weak end infeed 12 5 5 Settings PID 3522 SETTINGS v9 Table 271 ECRWPSCH Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description CurrRev Off On Off Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic tPickUpRev 0 000...

Page 464: ...of the directional comparison scheme during a single phase autoreclosing cycle to the BLOCK input of the directional comparison module 12 5 6 2 Fault current reversal logic M13929 11 v8 The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element connected to the input signal IRV which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction When the reverse direction element is activated the output ...

Page 465: ...cted to WEIBLK2 via an OR gate If neither the forward nor the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms the weak end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 236 and Figure 237 The weak end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when CBOPEN is high local breaker opens prior to faults appeared at the end of line If t...

Page 466: ...ons are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0 The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the earth fault function which is in operation AND OR OR OR AND AND t tPickUpWEI t 200 ms AND AND t 1500 ms CBOPEN VTSZ WEIBLK1 WEIBLK2 CRL BLOCK t 50 ms t 200 ms WEI Echo Trip ECHO IEC09000020 6 en vsd AND 3U0 a b t 15 ms TRWEI ST3...

Page 467: ... 273 ECRWPSCH technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Operate mode of WEI logic Off Echo Echo Trip Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip 5 70 of UBase 0 5 of Ur Operate time for current reversal logic 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 30 ms whichever is greater Delay time for current reversal 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 30 ms whichever is greater Coordination time for weak end infeed logic 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or ...

Page 468: ...462 ...

Page 469: ...h circuit breaker It provides a settable pulse prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length as well as all functionality necessary for correct co operation with autoreclosing functions The trip function block includes a settable latch function for the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout The trip function can collect start and directional signals from different application func...

Page 470: ...NL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L1 TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L2 TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L3 PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1 PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2 PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3 1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective carrier aided trip 1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective earth fault tr...

Page 471: ...al 13 1 5 Settings GUID 6D6424B9 B676 4D9B 949A 33C74BDC5711 v1 Table 276 SMPPTRC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On Program 3 phase 1ph 3ph 1ph 2ph 3ph 1ph 3ph Three ph single or three ph single two or three ph trip tTripMin 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 150 Minimum duration of trip output signal tWaitForPHS 0 020 0 500 s 0 001 0 05...

Page 472: ...ich all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs are routed It has a single three phase trip output TRIP to connect to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal Section 13 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Logic 466 Line distance protection REL650...

Page 473: ...TLKOUT TRIP Final Tripping Circuits TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF L1TRIP Phase Segregated L2TRIP L3TRIP BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF PSL1 PSL2 P3PTR PSL3 SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT Simplified logic where setting Program 1ph 2ph 3ph TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR3P CLLKOUT TR1P BLOCK L1TRIP L2TRIP L3TRIP P3PTR TRIPL1 1ph 2ph 3ph ...

Page 474: ... will force all tripping to be three phase This input is required in order to cooperate with the SMBRREC function In multi breaker arrangements one SMPPTRC function block is used for each circuit breaker The lockout function A tripped circuit breaker can be locked out and prevented from closing by the output close lockout CLLKOUT The reset lockout RSTLKOUT is the input for deactivating and resetti...

Page 475: ... REV are all available as outputs on the trip function All start and directional outputs are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model of the trip function The time stamping is updated each time an operate or start signal is changed The common DIR output general is mapped as dirGeneral 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse 3 both The phase wise directional outputs DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 and DIRN...

Page 476: ...se front logic simplified logic diagram IEC10000056 4 en Original vsdx L1TRIP TRIN OR 1PTREF t tWaitForPHS OR TRINL1 AND PSL1 OR OR AND AND PSL2 PSL3 TRINL2 TRINL3 L2TRIP L3TRIP OR OR OR LOOP AND AND OR 1PTRZ LOOP OR AND AND IEC10000056 V4 EN US Figure 241 Phase segregated front logic Section 13 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Logic 470 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 477: ...LKLKOUT OR OR TRIPL1 AND TRIPL3 TRIPL2 TRIPALL TRL2 TRL3 LOOP AND LOOP OR AND OR OR OR OR AND AND OR AND AND OR t 10 ms t 5 ms TR3P AND OR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT AND OR LOOP LOOP AND AND TR1P TR2P CLKLKOUT AutoLock TripLockout TRIP To ensure that the fault is single phase To ensure that the fault is two phase IEC17000066 V1 EN US Figure 243 Final tripping circuits 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 13 Logic Li...

Page 478: ...2 b13 b14 b15 AND AND XOR b0 b1 out BitsToInt DIRN STN STN FWN REVN dirPhsB 61850 Standard 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse dirPhsC 61850 Standard 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse dirNeut 61850 Standard 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward reverse IEC16000179 2 en vsdx IEC16000179 V2 EN US Figure 244 The directional logic 13 1 7 Technical data M12380 1 v12 Table 278 SMPPTRC technical data Fu...

Page 479: ...to provide general start and directional information for the IEC 61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC 13 2 3 Function block GUID 99B1DF71 F7C4 4954 8688 BC709C3C2A16 v1 SMAGAPC BLOCK STDIR1 STDIR2 STDIR3 STDIR4 STDIR5 STDIR6 STDIR7 STDIR8 STDIR9 STDIR10 STDIR11 STDIR12 STDIR13 STDIR14 STDIR15 STDIR16 STDIR IEC16000165 1 en vsdx IEC16000165 V1 EN US Figure 245 SMAGAPC function block 13 2 4 Signals P...

Page 480: ...s Name Type Description STDIR INTEGER Common start direction output 13 2 5 Settings PID 6906 SETTINGS v2 Table 281 SMAGAPC Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 13 2 6 Operation principle GUID 02403756 5715 4D6B 9308 540D72979BD0 v2 Start matrix The Start Matrix function requires that a protection function delivers the directiona...

Page 481: ... block This is done individually for each protection function connected to the StartMatrix via the STDIRX inputs see Figure 247 All STDIROUT signals are then connected via an OR gate see Figure 246 The DIRECTION criteria allow either forward or reverse phase wise forward FWLx or forward neutral FWN or phase wise reverse REVLx or reverse neutral REVN to pass through to the general STDIR output If b...

Page 482: ...a STDIRX STDIROUT START Criteria STDIRX STDIROUT START Criteria STDIRX STDIROUT START Criteria STDIRX STDIROUT START Criteria STDIRX STDIROUT START Criteria STDIRX STDIROUT START Criteria STDIRX STDIROUT 1 STDIR1 STDIR2 STDIR3 STDIR4 STDIR5 STDIR6 STDIR7 STDIR8 STDIR9 STDIR10 STDIR11 STDIR12 STDIR13 STDIR14 STDIR15 STDIR16 STDIR SMAGAPC StartMatrix IEC16000161 2 en vsdx IEC16000161 V2 EN US Figure...

Page 483: ...2 EN US Figure 247 The START Criteria function START in STL1 in STL3 in FW in REV in FWL1 in REVL1 in START out FW out REV out STL1 out FWL1 out REVL1 out STL2 out FWL2 out REVL2 out STL3 out FWL3 out REVL3 out 1 FWL2 in REVL2 in 1 FWL3 in REVL3 in 1 STL2 in DIRECTION Criteria START in STL1 in FW in REV in FWL1 in REVL1 in FWL2 in REVL2 in FWL3 in REVL3 in STL2 in in b0 IntToBits b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6...

Page 484: ...1 FW forward b2 REV reverse b3 STL1 startL1 b4 FWL1 forwardL1 b5 REVL1 reverseL1 b6 STL2 startL2 b7 FWL2 forwardL2 b8 REVL2 reverseL2 b9 STL3 startL3 b10 FWL3 forwardL3 b11 REVL3 reverseL3 b12 STN startN b13 FWN forwardN b14 REVN reverseN STARTCOMB BLOCK START FW REV STL1 FWL1 REVL1 STL2 FWL2 REVL2 STL3 FWL3 REVL3 STN FWN REVN STDIR IEC16000166 2 en vsdx IEC16000166 V2 EN US Figure 249 STARTCOMB P...

Page 485: ...DIR PROTECTION 4 BLOCK START FW REV STL1 FWL1 REVL1 STL2 FWL2 REVL2 STL3 FWL3 REVL3 STDIR STARTCOMB STN FWN REVN BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT STDIR TRIP SMPPTRC TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT START STL1 STL2 STL3 FW REV STN BLOCK START FW REV STL1 FWL1 REVL1 STL2 FWL2 REVL2 STL3 FWL3 REVL3 STDIR STARTCOMB STN FWN REVN BLOCK STA...

Page 486: ...3 v12 The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or steady output Section 13 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Logic 480 Line distance pr...

Page 487: ... function block 13 3 4 Signals PID 6513 INPUTSIGNALS v4 Table 282 TMAGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1 BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2 BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3 INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Bina...

Page 488: ...NPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22 INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23 INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24 INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25 INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26 INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27 INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28 INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29 INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30 INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31 INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32 PID 6513 OUTPUTSIGNALS v4 T...

Page 489: ...has logical value 1 the first output signal OUTPUT1 will get logical value 1 2 when any one of second 16 inputs signals INPUT17 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the second output signal OUTPUT2 will get logical value 1 3 when any one of all 32 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT32 has logical value 1 the third output signal OUTPUT3 will get logical value 1 By use of the settings ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 Mo...

Page 490: ...se time shall be set to at least 0 150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils 13 3 7 Technical data GUID 3AB1EE95 51BF 4CC4 99BD F4ECDAACB75A v1 Table 285 Number of TMAGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms TMAGAPC 6 6 13 4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID 64EA392C 950F 486C 8D96 6E7736B592BF v1 13 4...

Page 491: ...H Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1...

Page 492: ...l logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the function block When any one of 16 input signals INPUT1 to INPUT16 has logical value 1 the ALARM output signal will get logical value 1 The function has a drop off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady signal ALARM Input 1 Input 16 1 200 ms t IEC13000191 1 en vsd IEC13...

Page 493: ...v1 WRNCALH BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 WARNING IEC13000182 1 en vsd IEC13000182 V1 EN US 13 5 4 Signals PID 4127 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 290 WRNCALH Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1 INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2 INPUT3 BOOLEAN...

Page 494: ...tion Off On Off Operation Off On 13 5 6 Operation principle GUID 71C65C20 7B6C 499F BFCD E418AA55F7EC v2 The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING output signal The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block When any one of 16 input si...

Page 495: ...c for group indication INDCALH 13 6 2 Functionality GUID D8D1A4EE A87F 46C6 8529 277FC1ADA9B0 v4 The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals to a common indication LED and or contact in the IED 13 6 3 Function block GUID 9D89E183 449A 4016 AB83 E57C8DDBA843 v1 IEC13000183 1 en vsd INDCALH BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPU...

Page 496: ...14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16 PID 4128 OUTPUTSIGNALS v4 Table 295 INDCALH Output signals Name Type Description IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 13 6 5 Settings PID 4128 SETTINGS v4 Table 296 INDCALH Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 13 6 6 Operation principle GUID 72B1B4...

Page 497: ...gic blocks and timers are always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the same number of instances AND function block The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with bo...

Page 498: ...memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The SET input has priority TIMERSET function has pick up and drop out delayed outputs related to the input signal The timer has a settable time delay XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables XOR has two inputs and two outputs One of t...

Page 499: ... instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms AND 60 60 160 13 7 2 Controllable gate function block GATE IP11021 1 v2 M11489 3 v2 The Controllable gate function block GATE is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting 13 7 2 1 Function block M11490 3 v2 IEC04000410 2 en vsd GATE INPUT OUT IEC04000410 V2 EN U...

Page 500: ... instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms GATE 10 10 20 13 7 3 Inverter function block INV IP11011 1 v2 13 7 3 1 Function block M11445 3 v1 IEC04000404_2_en vsd INV INPUT OUT IEC04000404 V2 EN US Figure 256 INV function block 13 7 3 2 Signals PID 3803 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 305 INV Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input PID 3803 OUTPUTSIGNALS v4 Tab...

Page 501: ...nction block GUID EE44CFDF C8F7 4870 BD1C 98D9CD91FD97 v4 LLD INPUT OUT IEC15000144 vsd IEC15000144 V1 EN US Figure 257 LLD function block 13 7 4 2 Signals PID 3805 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 308 LLD Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal PID 3805 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 309 LLD Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle 1...

Page 502: ...ame Type Default Description INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate PID 3806 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 312 OR Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate 13 7 ...

Page 503: ...TIMER Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer PID 6985 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 315 PULSETIMER Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer 13 7 6 3 Settings PID 6985 SETTINGS v1 Table 316 PULSETIMER Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description t 0 000 90000 000 s 0 001 0 010 Time delay of function 13 7 ...

Page 504: ...iority over SET input Table 318 Truth table for RSMEMORY function block RESET SET OUT NOUT 0 0 Last value Inverted last value 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 13 7 7 1 Function block GUID 50D5A4C0 59BF 44DE 86AC 47640ACD35A7 v3 RSMEMORY SET RESET OUT NOUT IEC09000294 1 en vsd IEC09000294 V1 EN US Figure 260 RSMEMORY function block 13 7 7 2 Signals PID 3811 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 319 RSMEMORY Input signals N...

Page 505: ...Y is a flip flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs where one is inverted The memory setting controls if after a power interruption the flip flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption The input SET has priority Table 323 Truth table for SRMEMORY function block SET RESET OUT NOUT 0 0 Las...

Page 506: ...Memory Off On On Operating mode of the memory function 13 7 8 4 Technical data GUID 7A0F4327 CA83 4FB0 AB28 7C5F17AE6354 v1 Table 327 Number of SRMEMORY instances Logic block Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms SRMEMORY 10 10 20 13 7 9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET IP11022 1 v2 M11494 3 v3 The Settable timer function block TIMERSET timer has two outputs for the delay of the input si...

Page 507: ...ET function block 13 7 9 2 Signals PID 6976 INPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 328 TIMERSET Input signals Name Type Default Description INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer PID 6976 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 329 TIMERSET Output signals Name Type Description ON BOOLEAN Output from timer pick up delayed OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer drop out delayed 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 13 Logic Line distance protection REL650 2 2 ...

Page 508: ... ms 13 7 10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018 1 v2 M11477 3 v4 The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables XOR has two inputs and two outputs One of the outputs is inverted The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same Table 332 Truth table for XOR function block INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT 0 0 0 1 0 1...

Page 509: ...s XOR 10 10 20 13 8 Fixed signals FXDSIGN 13 8 1 Identification SEMOD167904 2 v2 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Fixed signals FXDSIGN 13 8 2 Functionality M15322 3 v12 The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN has nine pre set fixed signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED either for forcing the unused inputs in other fu...

Page 510: ...h no characters ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off 13 8 5 Settings PID 1325 SETTINGS v11 The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 13 8 6 Operation principle SEMOD54827 5 v6 There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block OFF is a boolean signal fixed to OFF boolean 0 valu...

Page 511: ... ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I 13 9 2 Functionality SEMOD175725 4 v5 Boolean to integer conversion 16 bit B16I is used to transform a set of 16 boolean logical signals into an integer 13 9 3 Function block SEMOD175798 5 v4 IEC07000128 2 en vsd B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT IEC07000128 V2 EN US Figure 266 ...

Page 512: ... 11 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 PID 3606 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 338 B16I Output signals Name Type Description OUT INTEGER Output value 13 9 5 Monitored data PID 3606 MONITOREDDATA v4 Table 339 B16I Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OUT INTEGER Output value 13 9 6 Settings ABBD8E283673 v...

Page 513: ...from function block B16I for 1 x 16 The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block B16I Name of input Type Default Description Value when activated Value when deactivated IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0 IN7 BOOL...

Page 514: ...o integer conversion with logical node representation 16 bit BTIGAPC 13 10 2 Functionality SEMOD175781 4 v8 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation 16 bit BTIGAPC is used to transform a set of 16 boolean logical signals into an integer The block input will freeze the output at the last value 13 10 3 Function block SEMOD175801 5 v4 BTIGAPC BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN...

Page 515: ...1 IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 PID 6944 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 342 BTIGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT INTEGER Output value 13 10 5 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3 The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600 13 10 6 Monitored data PID 6944 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 343 B...

Page 516: ...BTIGAPC for 1 x 16 The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC Name of input Type Default Description Value when activated Value when deactivated IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 ...

Page 517: ...EEE C37 2 device number Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 13 11 2 Functionality SEMOD158373 5 v6 Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean logical signals 13 11 3 Function block SEMOD158389 4 v4 IB16 BLOCK INP OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 IEC06000501 3 en vsdx IEC06000501 V3 ...

Page 518: ...AN Output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 13 11 5 Setting parameters ABBD8E242451 v3 The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 13 11 6 Operation principle SEMOD158385 4 v4 With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 1 and the re...

Page 519: ...ly If the BLOCK input is activated it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1 x 16 The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the function block IB16 Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when deactivated OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 ...

Page 520: ...rsion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16 boolean logic output signals ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R L Remote Local push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R Remote i e the LED adjacent to...

Page 521: ...R 1 Operator place selection PID 3627 OUTPUTSIGNALS v7 Table 349 ITBGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 OUT13 BOOLEAN Output...

Page 522: ...r value received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1 x 16 The values represented by the different OUTx are according to Table...

Page 523: ...TO is in position Off or Local then no changes are applied to the outputs 13 12 7 Technical data GUID A339BBA3 8FD0 429D BB49 809EAC4D53B0 v1 Table 351 Number of ITBGAPC instances Function Quantity with cycle time 3 ms 8 ms 100 ms ITBGAPC 4 4 8 13 13 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC 13 13 1 Identification GUID 1913E066 37D1 4689 9178 5B3C8B029815 v3...

Page 524: ...ing and reset of the total integrated time Report of the integrated time 13 13 3 Function block GUID 6D50A060 7751 405B AEC1 FAE942EBDA64 v2 TEIGAPC BLOCK IN RESET WARNING ALARM OVERFLOW ACCTIME IEC14000014 1 en vsd IEC14000014 V1 EN US Figure 271 TEIGAPC function block 13 13 4 Signals PID 6836 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 352 TEIGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the...

Page 525: ...vision tAlarm 1 00 999999 00 s 0 01 1200 00 Time limit for alarm supervision 13 13 6 Operation principle GUID 04CC8365 DCDE 4DC7 BEF0 6EF8382305DD v3 The elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC provides time integration accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high blocking and reset of the total integrated time supervision of limit transgression and overflow the overflow limit is...

Page 526: ...he integration value Consequently all other outputs are also reset unconditionally on the input IN value reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero BLOCK Freeze the integration and block reset the other outputs unconditionally on the signal value BLOCK request overrides RESET request Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression overflow if output ACCTIME 999999 9 seconds alarm i...

Page 527: ...544AB8688 v3 The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non volatile memory 13 13 7 Technical data GUID B258726E 1129 47C9 94F9 BE634A2085FA v3 Table 355 TEIGAPC Technical data Function Cycle time ms Range or value Accuracy Elapsed time integration 3 0 999999 9 s 0 2 or 20 ms whichever is greater 8 0 999999 9 s 0 2 or 100 ms whichever is greater 100 0 999999 9 s 0 2 or 250 ms whiche...

Page 528: ...red with reference value REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value PID 6928 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 358 INTCOMP Output signals Name Type Description INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value 13 14 5 Settings PID 6928 SETTINGS v2 Table 359 IN...

Page 529: ...ond input signal REF If RefSource is selected as Set Value then the reference value for comparison is taken from setting SetValue The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it depends on the setting EnaAbs If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done If EnaAbs is selected as Signed...

Page 530: ...cription IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real 13 15 2 Functionality GUID E17A88D7 D095 4F36 9CD5 64EBFD2A1DEA v1 The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system relative to each other or to a fixed value It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring su...

Page 531: ...n for absolute or signed comparison RefSource Set Value Input REF Set Value Selection for reference value either input or setting SetValue 999 999 999 999 0 001 0 001 Set value for reference SetValPrefix milli unit kilo Mega Giga unit Multiplication factor for SetValue EqualBandHigh 0 10 10 00 0 01 0 50 Equal band high limit in of reference value EqualBandLow 0 10 10 00 0 01 0 50 Equal band low li...

Page 532: ...parison is done If EnaAbs is selected as Signed then the comparison is done without absolute conversion High Comparator Low comparator XOR ABS INPUT REF INHIGH INEQUAL INLOW T F ABS EqualBandHigh EnaAbs EqualBandLow RefSource SetValue SetValPrefix IEC15000130 2 en vsdx T F T F IEC15000130 V2 EN US Figure 274 Logic diagram for REALCOMP This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow t...

Page 533: ...uring the above mentioned condition due to marginal value for avoiding oscillations of function outputs the INLOW output will never set 13 15 7 Technical data GUID 62792FCB B436 4034 9A08 C9FF918FF547 v1 REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ GUID 3FDD7677 1D86 42AD A545 B66081C49B47 v3...

Page 534: ...528 ...

Page 535: ...e component measurement VMSQI U1 U2 U0 SYMBOL TT V1 EN US Phase neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU U SYMBOL UU V1 EN US 14 1 2 Functionality SEMOD54488 4 v12 Measurement functions are used for power system measurement supervision and reporting to the local HMI monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example via IEC 61850 The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of acti...

Page 536: ...vision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting Main menu Measurement Monitoring Service values CVMMXN The measurement function CVMMXN provides the following power system q...

Page 537: ...angle U sequence voltages positive zero and negative sequence amplitude and angle 14 1 3 Function block SEMOD130334 4 v7 The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware TRM and the logic configuration made in PCM600 CVMMXN I3P U3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE IEC10000016 1 en vsd IEC10000016 V1 EN US F...

Page 538: ... IEC05000703 V2 EN US Figure 279 CMSQI function block IEC05000704 2 en vsd VMSQI U3P 3U0 3U0RANG 3U0ANGL U1 U1RANG U1ANGL U2 U2RANG U2ANGL IEC05000704 V2 EN US Figure 280 VMSQI function block IEC09000850 1 en vsd VNMMXU U3P UL1 UL1RANG UL1ANGL UL2 UL2RANG UL2ANGL UL3 UL3RANG UL3ANGL IEC09000850 V1 EN US Figure 281 VNMMXU function block Section 14 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Monitoring 532 Line distance pro...

Page 539: ... deadband value Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated curre...

Page 540: ...UP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input PID 6738 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 371 VMMXU Output signals Name Type Description UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle magnitude of reported value UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude magnitude of reported value UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle magnitude of reporte...

Page 541: ...n U3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for voltage input PID 6739 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 375 VMSQI Output signals Name Type Description 3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude magnitude of reported value 3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range 3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle magnitude of reported value U1 REAL U1 Amplitude magnitude of reported value U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle magnitude of reported value U...

Page 542: ... are used in the Unit and Description columns UBase UB Base voltage in primary kV This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object IBase IB Base current in primary A This current is used as reference for current setting It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised...

Page 543: ...ing type UMin 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of UBase UMax 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of UBase URepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type IMin 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 5 0 Minimum value in of IBase IMax 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of IBase IRepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1mi...

Page 544: ...10 Cycl Report interval s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s PZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range PHiHiLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of SBase PHiLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of SBase PLowLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 120 0 Low limit in of SBase PLowLowLim 2000 0 2000 0 SB 0 1 150 0 Low Low limit in of SBase PLimHyst 0 000 10...

Page 545: ...s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s IZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range IHiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase IHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase ILowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of IBase ILowLowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of IBase ILimHyst 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of r...

Page 546: ...eport interval s Db In 0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s Operation Off On Off Operation Mode On Off IL1Min 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of IBase IL1Max 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of IBase GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups IL1RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type IL1AngDbRepInt ...

Page 547: ...ation for current at 5 of Ir IAngComp30 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 30 of Ir IAngComp100 10 000 10 000 Deg 0 001 0 000 Angle calibration for current at 100 of Ir IL1LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits IL2ZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range IL2HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High...

Page 548: ...0 001 of range Int Db In 0 001 s UL23ZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range UL23Min 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of UBase UL23Max 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of UBase UL23RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type UL23AngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s UL31DbRepInt 1...

Page 549: ...1 120 0 High limit in of UBase UL31LowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of UBase UL31LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of UBase UL31LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits PID 6736 SETTINGS v3 Table 384 CMSQI Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3I0DbRepInt 1 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl Report interval s ...

Page 550: ... 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits I2AngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s Table 385 CMSQI Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description 3I0HiHiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of IBase 3I0HiLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of IBase 3I0LowLim 0 0 500 0 IB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of IBase 3I0LowLowLim 0 0 5...

Page 551: ...In 0 001 s U1ZeroDb 0 100000 m 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in 0 001 of range U1Min 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 50 0 Minimum value in of UBase U1Max 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 200 0 Maximum value in of UBase U1RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type U1LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits U1AngDbRepInt 1...

Page 552: ... 0 UB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of UBase U2HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 150 0 High High limit in of UBase U2HiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 120 0 High limit in of UBase U2LowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 80 0 Low limit in of UBase U2LowLowLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 60 0 Low Low limit in of UBase PID 6737 SETTINGS v2 Table 388 VNMMXU Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description UL1DbRepInt 1 100000...

Page 553: ...lue in of UBase UL3RepTyp Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cyclic 5s Db Cyclic 30s Db Cyclic 1min Cyclic Reporting type UL3LimHys 0 000 100 000 0 001 5 000 Hysteresis value in of range common for all limits UL3AngDbRepInt 1 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval s Table 389 VNMMXU Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description UL1HiHiLim 0 0 200 0 UB 0 1 150 0 High High l...

Page 554: ... magnitude of deadband value U REAL kV Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value I REAL A Calculated current magnitude of deadband value F REAL Hz System frequency magnitude of deadband value PID 6735 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 391 CMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IL1 REAL A IL1 Amplitude magnitude of reported value IL1ANGL REAL deg IL1 Angle magnitude of reported valu...

Page 555: ...it Description 3I0 REAL A 3I0 Amplitude magnitude of reported value 3I0ANGL REAL deg 3I0 Angle magnitude of reported value I1 REAL A I1 Amplitude magnitude of reported value I1ANGL REAL deg I1 Angle magnitude of reported value I2 REAL A I2 Amplitude magnitude of reported value I2ANGL REAL deg I2 Angle magnitude of reported value PID 6739 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 394 VMSQI Monitored data Name Type Va...

Page 556: ...L deg UL3 Angle magnitude of reported value 14 1 7 Operation principle 14 1 7 1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417 130 v4 The protection control and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre processing blocks The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built in options The ...

Page 557: ...the function block by means of four defined operating thresholds see figure 282 The monitoring has two different modes of operating Overfunction when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit XHiLim or High high limit XHiHiLim pre set values Underfunction when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit XLowLim or Low low limit XLowLowLim pre set values X_RANGE is illustrated in figure ...

Page 558: ... higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode The following basic reporting modes are available Cyclic reporting Cyclic Amplitude dead band supervision Dead band Integral dead band supervision Int deadband Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417 158 v3 The cyclic reporting of measured value is perform...

Page 559: ...last reported value and the change is larger than the ΔY pre defined limits that are set by user XDbRepInt then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary Figure 284 shows an example with the amplitude dead band supervision The picture is simplified the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time inte...

Page 560: ...mplified the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other The last value reported Y1 in figure 285 serves as a basic value for further measurement A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment discrete integral The absolute values of these integral value...

Page 561: ...A 4A38 BC9D 29538491254D v1 In this mode of operation the reporting interval will be cyclic like in reporting type cyclic This cyclic time has three options 5sec 30 sec and 1 min Additionally if a measuring value has changed from the last reported value and the change is larger than ΔY predefined limits that are set by user XDbRepInt then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher lev...

Page 562: ...OD54417 174 v7 The measurement function must be connected to three phase current and three phase voltage input in the configuration tool group signals but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED The end user can freely select by a parameter setting which one of the nine available measuring mo...

Page 563: ...en only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured 4 L1L2 1 2 1 2 L L L L S U I I EQUATION1391 V1 EN US Equation 62 1 2 1 2 2 L L L L U U I I I EQUATION1392 V1 EN US Equation 63 Used when only UL1L2 phase to phase voltage is available 5 L2L3 2 3 2 3 L L L L S U I I EQUATION1393 V1 EN US Equation 64 2 3 2 3 2 L L L L U U I I I EQUATION1394 V1 EN US Equation 65 Used when only UL2L3 phase to pha...

Page 564: ... power system is fully symmetrical Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P Q S PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas Re P S EQUATION1403 V1 EN US Equation 74 Im Q S EQUATION1404 V1 EN US Equation 75 2 2 S S P Q EQUATION1405 V1 EN US Equation 76 cos P PF S j EQUATION1406 V1 EN US Equation 77 Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals ...

Page 565: ...age phase signal in the group signals will be used as reference The amplitude and angle compensation will be used for other related input signals Low pass filtering SEMOD54417 233 v4 In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive low pass filtering of the measured values for P Q S U I and power factor This will make slower measur...

Page 566: ...he zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision see section Measurement supervision Compensation facility SEMOD54417 253 v5 In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain CT error VT error IED input transformer errors and so on it is possible to perform on si...

Page 567: ...g the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar Frequency SEMOD54417 261 v2 Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block It is simply obtained from the pre processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output 14 1 7 3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417 264 v7 The Phase current...

Page 568: ... CMSQI or voltage VMSQI input in the configuration tool to be operable No outputs other than X_RANG are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals Input signals are obtained from the pre processing block and transferred to corresponding output Positive negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs voltage and current ampl...

Page 569: ... 5 Ir I 4 0 Ir GUID 374C2AF0 D647 4159 8D3A 71190FE3CFE0 v5 Table 398 VMMXU technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Voltage 10 to 300 V 0 5 of U at U 50 V 0 2 of U at U 50 V Phase angle 10 to 300 V 0 5 degrees at U 50 V 0 2 degrees at U 50 V GUID 9B8A7FA5 9C98 4CBD A162 7112869CF030 v5 Table 399 CMSQI technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Current positive sequence I1 Three phase ...

Page 570: ...5 to 175 V 0 5 degrees at U 50 V 0 2 degrees at U 50 V 14 2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID 358AD8F8 AE06 4AEA 9969 46E5299D5B4B v3 14 2 1 Identification GUID AD96C26E C3E5 4B21 9ED6 12E540954AC3 v4 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG 63 14 2 2 Functionality GUID 0692CD0D F33E 4370 AC91 B216...

Page 571: ...BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal SENPRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal SETPLO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout PID 6950 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 403 SSIMG Output signals Name Type Description LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level or temperature above lockout level PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below...

Page 572: ...0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm 14 2 6 Monitored data PID 6950 MONITOREDDATA v5 Table 405 SSIMG Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value TEMP REAL deg Temperature of the insulation medium 14 2 7 Operation principle GUID 359458EA FFAA 4A44 A8E8 9469CA069C80 v7 Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas ...

Page 573: ...t TEMPLO The TEMPLO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms and the BLOCK input can block both alarm and the lockout indications The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature alarm condition exists inside the circuit breaker The output ALARM can be blocked by activating...

Page 574: ...SIML 71 14 3 2 Functionality GUID 3B1A665F 60A5 4343 85F4 AD9C066CBE8D v6 Insulation supervision for liquid medium SSIML is used for monitoring the transformer condition Binary information based on the oil level in the transformer is used as input signals to the function In addition the function generates alarms based on received information 14 3 3 Function block GUID AC82A86C 495D 4CBD 9BF9 3CC76...

Page 575: ...ove alarm level LVLALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level LEVEL REAL Level service value TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium 14 3 5 Settings PID 6951 SETTINGS v7 Table 409 SSIML Group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On LevelAlmLimit 1 00 100 00 0 01 5 00 Alarm setting for level L...

Page 576: ...mit or binary signal from transformer SENLVLLO is high the oil level indication lockout LVLLO will be initiated There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time for which the function need not to initiate any alarm To avoid the intermittent alarm two time delays tLevelAlarm or tLevelLockOut have been included If the oil level goes below the settings for more than these time delays the...

Page 577: ...Technical data GUID 83B0F607 D898 403A 94FD 7FE8D45C73FF v7 Table 411 SSIMLTechnical data Function Range or value Accuracy Oil alarm level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Oil lockout level 1 00 100 00 10 0 of set value Temperature alarm level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Temperature lockout level 40 00 200 00 2 5 of set value Time delay for oil alarm 0 000 60 000 s 0 2 or 250ms whichever is greater...

Page 578: ...AL MONALM IPOWALPH IPOWLOPH SPCHALM GPRESALM GPRESLO IEC13000231 2 en vsd IEC13000231 V2 EN US Figure 291 SSCBR function block 14 4 4 Signals PID 3267 INPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 412 SSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description I3P GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for current input BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip comman...

Page 579: ...POWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds alarm limit IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds lockout limit SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level 14 4 5 Settings PID 3267 SETTINGS v10 Table 414 SSCBR Non group set...

Page 580: ...tes InactiveAlDays 0 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter Table 415 SSCBR Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description OpenTimeCorr 0 100 0 100 s 0 001 0 010 Correction for open travel time CloseTimeCorr 0 100 0 100 s 0 001 0 010 Correction for close travel time DirCoef 3 00 0 50 0 01 1 50 Directional coefficient for CB life calculation CBLifeAlmLeve...

Page 581: ...rExponent integrated over CB open travel time SPCHT REAL s The charging time of the CB spring 14 4 7 Operation principle GUID 3902D69C 1858 40DD AD63 C33C381697BA v12 The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions The subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of the subfunctions...

Page 582: ...Status CB Operation Monitoring CB Operation Cycles Accumulated energy Remaining Life of CB RSTCBWR IPOWLOPH IPOWALPH MONALM INADAYS PRESALM PRESLO GPRESALM GPRESLO SPCHALM SPCHT RSTSPCHT CB Spring Charge Monitoring RSTIPOW TRCMD IEC12000624 3 en vsd IEC12000624 V3 EN US Figure 292 Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring Section 14 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Monitoring 576 Line distance protection ...

Page 583: ...iary contacts Similarly the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts A compensation factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact tOpen t1 t2 t3 tClose t4 Main Contact POSCLOSE POSOPEN 0 1 0 1 1 0 tTravelOpen tOpen t1 t2 tT...

Page 584: ...ion of the circuit breaker that is whether the breaker is in the open closed or error position The operation is described in figure 295 Phase current check Contact position indicator POSCLOSE POSOPEN I3P ILRMSPH OPENPOS CLOSEPOS INVDPOS IEC12000613 3 en vsd IEC12000613 V3 EN US Figure 295 Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status Phase current check The module compares the ph...

Page 585: ...sd IEC12000620 V3 EN US Figure 296 Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker Circuit breaker remaining life estimation If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the RatedOperCurr setting the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one operation If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the...

Page 586: ...3P IL TRCMD IEC12000619 3 en vsd IEC12000619 V3 EN US Figure 297 Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy Accumulated energy calculation Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events It ends when the RMS current is lower than the AccSto...

Page 587: ...The value can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW Alarm limit check The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value AlmAccCurrPwr IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the LOAccCurrPwr setting The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM 14 4 7 5 Cir...

Page 588: ... the set value of the OperAlmLevel threshold setting If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the OperLOLevel setting the OPERLO output is activated The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is activated 14 4 7 6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID 6DAE4C6B BD66 49CD 817D 08E4EBF47DE0 v9 The circuit breaker operation monito...

Page 589: ...it Check SPRCHRST RSTSPCHT SPCHT SPCHALM IEC12000621 V2 EN US Figure 301 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication Spring charging time measurement Spring charging time calculation will be initiated as soon as the circuit breaker is closed and charging motor starts NO contact of the device is connected to SPRCHRST to store the energy in the close spring An indicator pr...

Page 590: ...ng The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input If the pressure drops further to a very low level the PRESLO binary input goes high activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO setting The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function The activation of the BLOCK input deac...

Page 591: ... identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Event function EVENT S00946 V1 EN US 14 5 2 Functionality M12805 6 v11 When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication time tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event func...

Page 592: ...t Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function INPUT1 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 1 INPUT2 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 2 INPUT3 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 3 INPUT4 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 4 INPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 5 INPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 6 INPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 7 INPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 8 INPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 9 INPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 10 INPUT11 GROUP SIGNAL 0 Input 11 INPUT12 GROUP SIGN...

Page 593: ...OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1 EventMask2 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2 EventMask3 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3 EventMask4 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4 EventMask5 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange...

Page 594: ...EventMask13 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13 EventMask14 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14 EventMask15 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15 EventMask16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16 MinRepIn...

Page 595: ... first eight inputs 1 8 must be used Inputs 9 16 can be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module while the binary input channels are ...

Page 596: ...ents at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66 of the maximum burst quota The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45 events per second 14 6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584 1 v2 14 6 1 Identification M16055 1 v8 Function description IEC 61850...

Page 597: ...ed signals from start of pre fault time to the end of post fault time will be included in the recording Disturbance record will have visible settings from all function instances that are configured in the application configuration tool Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR a configuration file CFG and a data file DAT The same ap...

Page 598: ...3 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 IEC05000431 V3 EN US Figure 306 A4RADR function block derived analog inputs SEMOD54845 4 v6 IEC05000432 3 en vsd B1RBDR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 IEC05000432 V3 EN US Figure 307 B1RBDR function block binary inputs example for B1RBDR B22RBDR Section ...

Page 599: ...ut 4 GRPINPUT5 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 5 GRPINPUT6 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 6 GRPINPUT7 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 7 GRPINPUT8 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 8 GRPINPUT9 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 9 GRPINPUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Group signal for input 10 GUID D025D5D9 A0F3 4A00 891A 63AD5F609A77 v2 A2RADR and A3RADR functions have the same input signal speci...

Page 600: ...ry channel 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8 INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9 INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10 INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11 INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12 INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13 INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14 INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16...

Page 601: ...els 289 to 304 B20RBDR INPUT305 to INPUT320 binary channels 305 to 320 B21RBDR INPUT321 to INPUT336 binary channels 321 to 336 B22RBDR INPUT337 to INPUT352 binary channels 337 to 352 14 6 5 Settings PID 7068 SETTINGS v1 Table 424 DRPRDRE Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On PreFaultRecT 0 05 9 90 s 0 01 0 10 Pre fault record...

Page 602: ...annel 1 on or not off UnderTrigLe01 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in of signal OverTrigOp01 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 1 on or not off OverTrigLe01 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in of signal NomValue02 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 2 UnderTrigOp02 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 2 o...

Page 603: ...5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in of signal NomValue06 0 0 999999 9 0 1 0 0 Nominal value for analog channel 6 UnderTrigOp06 Off On Off Use under level trigger for analog channel 6 on or not off UnderTrigLe06 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6 in of signal OverTrigOp06 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 6 on or not off OverTrigLe06 0 5000 1 20...

Page 604: ...10 on or not off UnderTrigLe10 0 200 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10 in of signal OverTrigOp10 Off On Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 10 on or not off OverTrigLe10 0 5000 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in of signal GUID E05EEC82 CB90 4E73 B9C9 4C16FD95FCBF v1 A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings basic as A1RADR but with different ...

Page 605: ...ff Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4 TrigDR05 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED05 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5 TrigDR06 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED06 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6 TrigDR07 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED07 Off Start Trip Start and Trip...

Page 606: ...tart and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13 TrigDR14 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED14 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14 TrigDR15 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED15 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15 TrigDR16 Off On Off Trigger operation On Off SetLED16 Off Start Trip Start and Trip Off Set LED...

Page 607: ...Function type for binary channel 8 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo8 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType9 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo9 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9 IEC 60870 5 103 FunType10 0 255 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 IEC 60870 5 103 InfNo10 0 255 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10 IE...

Page 608: ...3 IndicationMa03 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 3 TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 4 IndicationMa04 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 4 TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 5 IndicationMa05 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary c...

Page 609: ...n mask for binary channel 15 TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Trig on 1 Trigger on positive 1 or negative 0 slope for binary input 16 IndicationMa16 Hide Show Show Indication mask for binary channel 16 GUID 8702C5B9 05A3 4E61 8952 C66483FFDFE2 v3 B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings basic as B1RBDR but with different numbering examples given in brackets B2RBDR 17 to 32 SetLE...

Page 610: ...7 indication mask for binary channel 97 B8RBDR 113 to 128 IndicationMa113 indication mask for binary channel 113 B9RBDR 129 to 144 IndicationMa129 indication mask for binary channel 129 B10RBDR 145 to 160 IndicationMa145 indication mask for binary channel 145 B11RBDR 161 to 176 IndicationMa161 indication mask for binary channel 161 B12RBDR 177 to 192 IndicationMa177 indication mask for binary chan...

Page 611: ...ver level trig for analog channel 4 activated UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 5 activated OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 5 activated UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 6 activated OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 6 activated UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 7 activated OvTrig...

Page 612: ...BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 14 activated UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 15 activated OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 15 activated UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 16 activated OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 16 activated UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel...

Page 613: ...BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 24 activated UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 25 activated OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 25 activated UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 26 activated OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 26 activated UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel...

Page 614: ...BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 34 activated UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 35 activated OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 35 activated UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel 36 activated OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN Over level trig for analog channel 36 activated UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN Under level trig for analog channel...

Page 615: ...bance report are Event list EL Indications IND Event recorder ER Trip value recorder TVR Disturbance recorder DR Fault locator FL Settings information Figure 308 shows the relations between Disturbance Report included functions and function blocks Event list EL Event recorder ER and Indications IND uses information from the binary input function blocks BxRBDR Trip value recorder TVR uses analog in...

Page 616: ...runtime status and IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance record header file These settings information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for each function instance in the HDR file The function setting names and Enum values are same as in the HMI and can be translated to the selected HMI language All setting values are updated along with the units If the setting values are rel...

Page 617: ...nels and recording time and settings information Figure 310 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical configuration that is in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3 4 seconds The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report Event list EL Event recorder ER Indications IND and Trip value recorder...

Page 618: ...on is available via the local HMI or PCM600 Event list EL M12155 177 v6 The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time tagged events The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state The oldest data is overwritten The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600 Trip value recorder TVR M12155 91 v5 The recorded trip values include phasors of ...

Page 619: ... attribute tag is similar to the settings section It contains functions which have changes in parameter value or runtime status or IEC61850 behavior when compared with trigger and post processing settings values Fault locator FL M12155 186 v4 The fault location function calculates the distance to fault Time tagging M12155 194 v1 The IED has a built in real time calendar and clock This function is ...

Page 620: ...ng was triggered The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time Analog signals M12155 160 v8 Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance...

Page 621: ...nfiguration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool SMT external signal configuration In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used The preprocessor function block SMAI calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected AI4 input not used SMAI makes the informa...

Page 622: ... affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers The indications are also selected from these 352 signals with local HMI IndicationMask Show Hide Trigger signals M12155 164 v2 The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report except the event list which runs continuously As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled a complete disturbance report is recorded On...

Page 623: ... each channel This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle 20 ms for a 50 Hz network All under over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600 14 6 8 Technical data M12760 1 v10 Table 430 DRPRDRE technical data Function Range or value ...

Page 624: ...al status report BINSTATREP 14 7 2 Functionality GUID A72E490D 01F7 4874 B010 8BDE38391D88 v3 The Logical signal status report BINSTATREP function makes it possible for a SPA master to poll signals from various other functions 14 7 3 Function block GUID BA0A5BC3 493B 4FE3 B4A9 14F60A88A22F v2 BINSTATREP BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 IN...

Page 625: ...tatus report input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16 PID 4144 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 432 BINSTATREP Output signals Name Type Description OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1 OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2 OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3 OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5 OUTPUT6 BOO...

Page 626: ...l the input signal resets t t INPUTn OUTPUTn IEC09000732 1 en vsd IEC09000732 V1 EN US Figure 314 BINSTATREP logical diagram 14 8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451 1 v2 14 8 1 Identification SEMOD113212 2 v3 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Measured value expander block RANGE_XP 14 8 2 Functionality SEMOD52450 4 v7...

Page 627: ...ble 434 RANGE_XP Input signals Name Type Default Description RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range PID 3819 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 435 RANGE_XP Output signals Name Type Description HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high high limit HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high high limit NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between l...

Page 628: ...ce measuring function giving the distance to the fault in km miles or of line length The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double circuit lines The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents from each side This distribution of fault current...

Page 629: ...BRFLO Output signals Name Type Description CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data bit represents 80 BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data bit represents 40 BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data bit represents 20 BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data bit represents 10 BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in b...

Page 630: ...000 0 0 1 40 0 Length of line Table 440 LMBRFLO Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description DrepChNoIL1 1 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording phase current IL1 DrepChNoIL2 1 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder input number recording phase current IL2 DrepChNoIL3 1 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder input number recording phase current IL3 DrepChNoIN 0 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording re...

Page 631: ...ing distance to fault pre fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data thus the analog signals used by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function The analog configuration channel selection is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM600 The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load curre...

Page 632: ...or transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends the effect of double end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end If this is not done the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance The calculation algorithm used in...

Page 633: ...ce to the fault The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by IF IFA DA EQUATION96 V1 EN US Equation 80 Where IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement IED A and DA is a fault current distribution factor that is the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the total fault current For a single line the value is equal to DA 1 p Z L ZB ZA ZL ZB EQUATION97 V1 EN US...

Page 634: ...lex quantity for zero sequence compensation for the single line is equal to KN Z0L Z1L 3 Z1L EQUATION99 V1 EN US Equation 83 DI is the change in current that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault In the following the positive sequence impedance for ZA ZB and ZL is inserted into the equations because this is the value used in the algorithm For double lines the fault equa...

Page 635: ...n the form p 2 p K1 K2 K3 RF 0 EQUATION103 V1 EN US Equation 87 Where K1 UA IA ZL ZB ZL ZADD 1 EQUATION104 V1 EN US Equation 88 K2 UA IA ZL ZB ZL ZADD 1 è ø æ ö EQUATION105 V1 EN US Equation 89 K3 IFA IA ZL ZA ZB Z1 ZADD 1 è ø æ ö EQUATION106 V1 EN US Equation 90 and ZADD ZA ZB for parallel lines IA IFA and UA are given in the above table KN is calculated automatically according to equation 86 ZA ...

Page 636: ... the fault 14 9 7 3 The non compensated impedance model M14983 121 v3 In the non compensated impedance model IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current UA p Z1L IA RF IA EQUATION109 V1 EN US Equation 93 Where IA is according to table 442 The accuracy of the distance to fault calculation using the non compensated impedance model is influenced by the pre fault load current So this method i...

Page 637: ...four independent limits where the number of positive and or negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the setting values for limits The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit Overflow indication is included for each up counter 14 10 3 Operation principle GUID 4D58423F 329C 4553 9FAF E55A368849A5 v2 Limit counter L4UFCNT counts the number of posit...

Page 638: ...overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero as illustrated in figure 320 IEC12000626_1_en vsd Max value 3 Max value 1 Max value Max value 1 Max value 2 Max value...

Page 639: ...HMI Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely for example from a IEC 61850 client The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI graphical display 14 10 4 Function block GUID C90E7375 F3CC 414A 93FC 9AC4A9156FFC v1 L4UFCNT BLOCK INPUT RESET ERROR OVERFLOW LIMIT1 L...

Page 640: ...Off On Off Operation Off On CountType Positive edge Negative edge Both edges Positive edge Select counting on positive and or negative flanks CounterLimit1 1 65535 1 100 Value of the first limit CounterLimit2 1 65535 1 200 Value of the second limit CounterLimit3 1 65535 1 300 Value of the third limit CounterLimit4 1 65535 1 400 Value of the fourth limit MaxValue 1 65535 1 500 Maximum count value O...

Page 641: ...on is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high see also figure 322 Time Accumulation with Retain BLOCK ACC_HOUR RESET IN tWarning tAlarm OVERFLOW WARNING ALARM q 1 a b a b a b a b a b a b q 1 unit delay IEC15000321 1 en vsd ACC_DAY 99 999 9 h tAddToTime ADDTIME IEC15000321 V1 EN US Figure 322 TEILGAPC logics The main features of TEILGAPC are Applicable ...

Page 642: ...and block the outputs IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time when its value is high ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time PID 6998 OUTPUTSIGNALS v1 Table 450 TEILGAPC Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated tim...

Page 643: ...lation 14 11 6 Operation principle GUID C7F91D4E 5942 4006 B7C8 4F499E7DC49D v3 Figure 324 describes the simplified logic of the function Time Accumulation Transgression Supervision Plus Retain BLOCK ACC_HOUR RESET IN tAlarm OVERFLOW WARNING ALARM IEC15000322 vsd Loop Delay Loop Delay tWarning ACC_DAY ADDTIME tAddToTime IEC15000322 V1 EN US Figure 324 TEILGAPC Simplified logic TEILGAPC main functi...

Page 644: ... block reset the other outputs independent of the input IN value BLOCK request overrides RESETrequest Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression overflow if output ACC_HOUR 99 999 9 hours alarm if output ACC_HOUR tAlarm warning if output ACC_HOUR tWarning The ACC_HOURoutput represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY output represents the accumulated time in days tAlarm ...

Page 645: ... time Consequently in case of a power failure there is a risk of losing the difference in time between actual time and last time stored in the non volatile memory 14 11 7 Technical data GUID F5E124E3 0B85 41AC 9830 A2362FD289F2 v1 Table 452 TEILGAPC Technical data Function Range or value Accuracy Time limit for alarm supervision tAlarm 0 99999 9 hours 0 1 of set value Time limit for warning superv...

Page 646: ...640 ...

Page 647: ...y meter for calculation of energy consumption values The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function A scaled service value is available over the station bus The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality 15 1 3 Function block M13400 3 v5 PCFCNT BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT INVALID RE...

Page 648: ...is generated SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information 15 1 5 Settings PID 6509 SETTINGS v4 Table 455 PCFCNT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On EventMask NoEvents ReportEvents NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse counter CountCriteria Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange RisingEdge Pulse coun...

Page 649: ...e is a 32 bit signed integer with a range 0 2147483647 The counter is reset at initialization of the IED The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity Scaled Value pulse count x scale Time and Pulse Counter Quality The Pulse Counter Quality consists of Invalid board hardware error or configuration error Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted The transmission of the counter valu...

Page 650: ...on block for the Binary Input Module BIM The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter Each pulse counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording INVALID RESTART BLOCKED and NEW_VAL The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary ...

Page 651: ... and demand handling ETPMMTR W_Varh 15 2 2 Functionality GUID 6898E29B DA70 421C 837C 1BBED8C63A7A v3 Power system measurement CVMMXN can be used to measure active as well as reactive power values Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the accumulated active and reactive energy pulses in forward and reverse direct...

Page 652: ...emand values are calculated for both forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input 15 2 3 Function block SEMOD175502 4 v5 ETPMMTR P Q STARTACC STOPACC RSTACC RSTDMD ACCINPRG EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD IEC14000019 1 en vsd IEC14000019 V1 EN US Figure 327 ETPMMTR function ...

Page 653: ...rgy value ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reverse reactive power demand value for set...

Page 654: ...MVArh 0 001 1000 000 Reactive energy limit EnZeroClamp Off On On Enable of zero point clamping detection function LevZeroClampP 0 001 10000 000 MW 0 001 10 000 Zero point clamping level at active Power LevZeroClampQ 0 001 10000 000 MVAr 0 001 10 000 Zero point clamping level at reactive Power DirEnergyAct Forward Reverse Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward Reverse DirEnergyReac Forward...

Page 655: ...ctive power demand value for set interval MAXPRFD REAL MVAr Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval MAXPRRD REAL MVAr Maximum reverse reactive power demand value for set interval 15 2 7 Operation principle GUID 4A46757C EC5D 4BCE 9D09 C8152B062CE1 v3 The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements function CVMMXN are used and integrated over ...

Page 656: ...is low even if the integration of energy is enabled ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input T F STARTACC ACCINPRG RSTACC 1 q 1 STOPACC FALSE EnaAcc IEC13000186 4 en vsd q 1 unit delay IEC13000186 V4 EN US Figure 329 ACCINPRG Logic diagram The accumulated energy values in MWh and MVArh are available as service values and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting wh...

Page 657: ...by the energy per pulse value to get the number of pulses The number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls Figure 331 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction Similarly the pulse generation for...

Page 658: ... reverse direction When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu these outputs are reset to zero The energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim Figure 332 shows the logic of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value Similarly the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the a...

Page 659: ...F35 8C69 FFAA951FE374 v1 Table 463 Function Range or value Accuracy Energy metering MWh Export Import MVarh Export Import Input from MMXU No extra error at steady load 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 15 Metering Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 653 Technical manual ...

Page 660: ...654 ...

Page 661: ...ight DHCP is available for the front port and a device connected to it can thereby obtain an automatically assigned IP address 16 1 2 Settings PID 6775 SETTINGS v4 Table 464 AP_1 Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation on off of the access point Redundancy None PRP 0 PRP 1 HSR None Ethernet redundancy mode IPAddress 0 18 IP Address 1 ...

Page 662: ... TCP control server C37 118UDP5 Off On On IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server C37 118UDP6 Off On On IEEE 1344 and C37 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server DefaultGateway 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Default gateway IP address PID 6637 SETTINGS v3 Table 465 AP_FRONT Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description IPAddress 0 18 IP Address 1 10 1 15...

Page 663: ...7 118 UDP stream and the TCP control server DefaultGateway 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Default gateway IP address PID 6811 SETTINGS v3 Table 466 DHCP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description DHCPServer Off On Off Access point front DHCP server operation 16 2 Access point diagnostics 16 2 1 Functionality GUID 20F64A6D AA8C 47D7 AA7D 4810996B2FF2 v1 The access point dia...

Page 664: ...PUTSIGNALS v2 Table 467 SCHLCCH Output signals Name Type Description LINKUP BOOLEAN Access point link status DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm PID 6819 OUTPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 468 RCHLCCH Output signals Name Type Description REDLINKA BOOLEAN Channel A redundancy status REDLINKB BOOLEAN Channel B redundancy status DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm A B PID 6813 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 46...

Page 665: ...le 472 FRONTSTATUS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description GatewayConfig INTEGER 0 Ok 1 Error 1 Off 2 Invalid Gateway configuration status 16 3 Redundant communication 16 3 1 Identification GUID B7AE0374 0336 42B8 90AF 3AE1C79A4116 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IEC 62439 3 Parallel redundancy protocol PRP IEC ...

Page 666: ...ication according to 62439 3 uses two optical Ethernet ports 16 3 3 Operation principle GUID 73DB23CD A924 4B89 8AAB 1E79D44DE429 v1 PRP IEC 62439 3 redundant communication The communication is performed in parallel that is the same data package is transmitted on both channels simultaneously The received package identity from one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channe...

Page 667: ...ns over the ring Every node forwards the frames it receives from one port to another to reach the next node When the originating sender node receives the frame it sent the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels If no data package has been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s the output Link...

Page 668: ...es in digital format commonly known as Merging Units MU The rear access points are used for the communication The merging units MU are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more measuring transformers sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients or subscribers in the system Some merging units are able to get data from classical measuring transformers ot...

Page 669: ...e CTStarPoint4 FromObject ToObject ToObject ToObject towards protected object FromObject the opposite 16 4 3 Monitored data PID 6850 MONITOREDDATA v3 Table 475 MU1_HW Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MUDATA BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Fatal error data not received transmission errors time sync issues or inconsistent sample rate SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error High when IED clock is not w...

Page 670: ... Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for I1 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for I1 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output I1 BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No BadReference indication output for I2 Derived BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Derived indication output for I2 Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for I2 Inaccurate ...

Page 671: ...y indication output for I3 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for I3 Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for I3 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for I3 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for I3 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output I3 BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 N...

Page 672: ...ndication output for U1 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output for U1 OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OperatorBlocked indication output for U1 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for U1 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for U1 Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for U1 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Sourc...

Page 673: ...ndication output for U3 Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for U3 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for U3 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for U3 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output for U3 OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OperatorBlocked indication output for U3 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory i...

Page 674: ... output for U4 Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for U4 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for U4 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for U4 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output U4 16 5 Routes 16 5 1 Introduction GUID 95F9C7BA 92F8 489F AD0A 047410B5E66F v1 A route is a specified path for...

Page 675: ...8 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 IP address of the gateway DestIPAddress 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Destination IP address DestSubnetMask 0 18 IP Address 1 255 255 255 255 Destination IP subnet mask Name 1 18 1 Route1 User configurable name of the route 1 18 char 16 5 3 Monitored data PID 6761 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 477 ROUTE_1 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description RouteConfig INTEGER 0 Ok 1...

Page 676: ...670 ...

Page 677: ... 60870 5 103 communication protocol DNP 3 0 communication protocol Several protocols can be combined in the same IED 17 2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID 6BC4671F 6D06 4BBD B1FF 2F03FF16A856 v1 Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu Diagnostics IED status Protocol diagnostics The diagnostic values are Diagnostic value Description Off Protocol is turned off Error ...

Page 678: ... IEC 61850 Ed 1 or Ed 2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600 The IED is equipped with four optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850 8 1 station bus communication The IEC 61850 8 1 communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet front port IEC 61850 8 1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices IEDs from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering I...

Page 679: ...n group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On GOOSEPortEd1 AP_FRONT AP_1 AP_2 AP_3 AP_4 AP_5 AP_6 AP_1 Selection of GOOSE port only for IEC61850 Ed1 ProtocolEdition Ed 1 Ed 2 Ed 1 Protocol Edition RemModControl Off Maintenance All levels Off Remote Mode Control AllowSimulation No Yes No Allow simulated GOOSE values or simulated sampled...

Page 680: ...IEDs 1 25 Mbit s Protocol SPA Communication speed for the IEDs 300 38400 Bd 17 4 5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC SP16GAPC SEMOD55999 1 v4 17 4 5 1 Functionality SEMOD55713 5 v8 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation 17 4 5 2 Function block SEMOD54...

Page 681: ...ion BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status IN13 BOO...

Page 682: ...L Output 3 status OUT4 GROUP SIGNAL Output 4 status OUT5 GROUP SIGNAL Output 5 status OUT6 GROUP SIGNAL Output 6 status OUT7 GROUP SIGNAL Output 7 status OUT8 GROUP SIGNAL Output 8 status OUT9 GROUP SIGNAL Output 9 status OUT10 GROUP SIGNAL Output 10 status OUT11 GROUP SIGNAL Output 11 status OUT12 GROUP SIGNAL Output 12 status OUT13 GROUP SIGNAL Output 13 status OUT14 GROUP SIGNAL Output 14 statu...

Page 683: ...end the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation It can also be used inside the same IED to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value 17 4 6 2 Function block SEMOD54712 4 v4 MVGAPC BLOCK IN VALUE RANGE IEC14000022 1 en vsd IEC14000022 V1 EN US Figure 343 MVGAPC function block 17 4 6 3 Signals SEMOD559...

Page 684: ... multiplication factor MV llLim 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 900 00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV min 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 1000 00 Minimum value multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV max 5000 00 5000 00 xBase 0 01 1000 00 Maximum value multiplied with the base prefix multiplication factor MV dbType Cyclic Deadband Int deadband Db Cycl...

Page 685: ...le point value GOOSEDPRCV 17 4 7 2 Functionality GUID 1D2DBC22 4F04 4809 B34E 8939D442C185 v3 GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE 17 4 7 3 Function block GUID ED277880 FB5D 4630 872F 9F343D449FFE v1 GOOSEDPRCV BLOCK SRCDPOUT DPOUT DATAVALID COMMVALID TEST IEC10000249 2 en vsdx IEC10000249 V2 EN US Figure 344 GOOSEDPRCV function block 17 4 7 4 Signa...

Page 686: ...6 Operation principle GUID 82A1C8A2 827A 40EF 8E58 F573E29E468E v4 The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test...

Page 687: ...r OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 17 4 8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 17 4 8 1 Identification GUID 93A1E81B 1DE8 483A BB3B DB771EE66DC1 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV 17 4 8 2 Functionality GUID 27B1ED7A C8E8 499E 89C1 ...

Page 688: ...on INTOUT INTEGER Integer output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output TEST BOOLEAN Test output 17 4 8 5 Settings PID 6829 SETTINGS v3 Table 494 GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 17 4 8 6 Operation principle GUID 5BBDF772 3B3E 4F7C ABE9 18CE3C1...

Page 689: ...o receive the integer values The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW 17 4 9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV 17 4 9 1 Identification GUID...

Page 690: ...t signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function SRCMVOUT REAL 0 Source to measurand value output PID 6830 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 496 GOOSEMVRCV Output signals Name Type Description MVOUT REAL Measurand value output DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output TEST BOOLEAN Test output 17 4 9 5 Sett...

Page 691: ...Error Freeze 0 0 0 The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection in case easy GOOSE engineering is enabled to receive the measured value The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is IN...

Page 692: ...nabled For instructions on how to enable Easy GOOSE engineering in PCM600 refer to the Engineering Manual PID 6832 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 498 GOOSESPRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function SRCSPOUT BOOLEAN 0 Source to single point output PID 6832 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 499 GOOSESPRCV Output signals Name Type Description SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output DAT...

Page 693: ... block 0 0 1 0 Receiver in block and communication error 0 0 0 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Test Updated 1 1 1 Communication Error 0 0 0 0 The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled to receive the b...

Page 694: ...00048 4 en vsd GOOSEINTLKRCV BLOCK SRCRESREQ SRCRESGR SRCAPP1 SRCAPP2 SRCAPP3 SRCAPP4 SRCAPP5 SRCAPP6 SRCAPP7 SRCAPP8 SRCAPP9 SRCAPP10 SRCAPP11 SRCAPP12 SRCAPP13 SRCAPP14 SRCAPP15 RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9...

Page 695: ...NTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 6 position SRCAPP7 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 7 position SRCAPP8 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 8 position SRCAPP9 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 9 position SRCAPP10 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 10 position SRCAPP11 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 11 position SRCAPP12 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 12 position SRCAPP13 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 13 position SRCAPP14 ...

Page 696: ...tus 9 position is open APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is va...

Page 697: ...ing IED is in test mode Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test Incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Incoming data with q oldData 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q Invalid 0 0 1 0 Incoming data with q test 0 0 1 1 Incoming data with q test oldData 0 0 1 1 Receiver in block 0 0 1 0 Receiver in block and communication error 0 0 0 0 Receiver in test mode and incoming data with q Normal Updated 1 1 0 Re...

Page 698: ...ID2 OUT3 DVALID3 OUT4 DVALID4 OUT5 DVALID5 OUT6 DVALID6 OUT7 DVALID7 OUT8 DVALID8 OUT9 DVALID9 OUT10 DVALID10 OUT11 DVALID11 OUT12 DVALID12 OUT13 DVALID13 OUT14 DVALID14 OUT15 DVALID15 OUT16 DVALID16 COMMVALID TEST IEC07000047 V4 EN US Figure 349 GOOSEBINRCV function block 17 4 12 2 Signals SEMOD173166 1 v2 GUID 2DC54788 86AF 4B4B 8E57 A89E30F0C433 v1 Except for the BLOCK input the rest of the inp...

Page 699: ...to binary output 14 SRCOUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 15 SRCOUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 16 PID 6827 OUTPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 505 GOOSEBINRCV Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1 DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1 OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2 DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2 OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3 DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid da...

Page 700: ... Test Output 17 4 12 3 Settings SEMOD173168 1 v2 PID 6827 SETTINGS v3 Table 506 GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On Off Operation Off On 17 4 12 4 Operation principle GUID 950F2501 9183 43C0 A193 7D15124F6CCE v1 The DVALIDx output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the s...

Page 701: ...IGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the DVALIDx output will be LOW 17 4 13 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device GOOSEXLNRCV 17 4 13 1 Identification GUID 4B23D0CF F298 4BBC B833 1B8CC98D1604 v1 Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number GOOSE function block to receive a switch...

Page 702: ...nections are visible and possible to make only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled For instructions on how to enable Easy GOOSE engineering in PCM600 refer to the Engineering Manual PID 6643 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 507 GOOSEXLNRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals SRCBEH INTEGER 0 Source to behaviour output SRCLOC BOOLEAN 0 Source to local control b...

Page 703: ...POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on PosVal output OPCNT INTEGER Operation counter OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCnt output BLK BOOLEAN Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN BLK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Blk output STSELD BOOLEAN The controllable data is in the status selected STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on stSeld output OPRCVD BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object re...

Page 704: ...ted will be updated The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple level If quality data validity is GOOD then the xxx_VALID output will be HIGH If quality data validity is INVALID QUESTIONABLE OVERFLOW FAILURE or OLD DATA then the xxx_VALID output will be LOW 17 5 IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE communication protocol GUID 6814F62B 8D99 4679 A11E 68048D1AC424 v2 17 5 1 Intro...

Page 705: ...H BOOLEAN High when IED clock is not within configured accuracy or time domain SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Fatal error or recovery state after fatal error High if any subscribed channel has bad quality or TEST while IED not in test mode MUSYNCH BOOLEAN MU not synced or MU clock not synced to same clock as IED TESTMODE BOOLEAN Quality of one or more subscribed analogue channels is TEST SIMMODE BOOLEAN MU deli...

Page 706: ...ample rate SYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error High when IED clock is not within configured accuracy or time domain SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Fatal error or recovery state after fatal error High if any subscribed channel has bad quality or TEST while IED not in test mode MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error MU not synced or MU clock not synced to same clock as IED TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Quality of one or mo...

Page 707: ...tput for I2 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for I2 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for I2 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indication output for I2 OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OperatorBlocked indication output for I2 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for I2 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indicat...

Page 708: ...Validity indication output I3 BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No BadReference indication output for I4 Derived BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Derived indication output for I4 Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure indication output for I4 Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inaccurate indication output for I4 Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Inconsistent indication output for I4 OldData BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OldData indicatio...

Page 709: ...tion output for U1 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for U1 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for U1 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionable Validity indication output U1 BadReference BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No BadReference indication output for U2 Derived BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Derived indication output for U2 Failure BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Failure i...

Page 710: ...cation output for U3 Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Oscillatory indication output for U3 OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No OutOfRange indication output for U3 Overflow BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Overflow indication output for U3 Source BOOLEAN 0 Process 1 Substituted Source indication output for U3 Test BOOLEAN 1 Yes 0 No Test indication output for U3 Validity INTEGER 0 Good 2 Reserved 1 Invalid 3 Questionabl...

Page 711: ...ut U4 17 5 6 Operation principle GUID A1D31CDA 1FE2 4BC0 A472 1B35E73CA1F2 v4 The merging units MUs are situated close to the primary equipment like circuit breakers isolators etc The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from measuring transformers non conventional transducers or both The gathered data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus utilizing the IEC UCA 6185...

Page 712: ... Preprocessing blocks SMAI IED Access Point IEC08000072 V3 EN US Figure 351 Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and conventional CT VT The function has the following alarm signals MUDATA Ok 0 indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit and are accepted ERROR 1 indicates that the merging unit samples are generated by internal substitution SYNCH ...

Page 713: ...tes when merging unit data are generated by internal substitution when one more channel s Quality is not good when merging unit is in Testmode detailed quality Test IED is not in test mode MUSYNCH OK 0 indicates when SyncLostMode Block BlockOnLostUTC the time quality of the hardware is within the set value SyncAccLevel 1us 4us or Unspecified AND merging unit is time synchronized smpSynch flag in d...

Page 714: ...values will be forced to 0 with quality as Invalid Substituted Failure Timeout TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel The timeout is individually specified per time source PPS IRIG B SNTP etc See section Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN Blocking condition Blocking of protection functions is indicated...

Page 715: ...he outputs as per IEC 61850 7 3 standard When written to IED the configuration will show the expanded form of the respective MU channel quality information during the online monitoring in the ACT The validity status of the quality as described in IEC 61850 7 3 is expanded to Good Invalid Reserved and Questionable QUEST outputs The detailed quality as described in IEC 61850 7 3 is expanded to Overf...

Page 716: ...otocol IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE FX 17 6 LON communication protocol IP14420 1 v1 17 6 1 Functionality M11924 3 v6 An optical network can be used within the substation automation system This enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator s workplace from the control center and also from other terminals LON communication protocol is specif...

Page 717: ... design With protection and control devices fibre optic media is used which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1 25 Mbits s The protocol is a peer to peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes max 255 subnets 127 nodes per one subnet The LON bus links the different parts of the protectio...

Page 718: ...n Station communication LON HORZCOMM 1 where Operation must be set to ON Add LON Device Types LNT M15083 19 v3 A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package version 1p2 r04 LON net address M15083 22 v3 To establish a LON connection the IED has to be given a unique net address The net a...

Page 719: ... a loop time of 100 ms The EVENT blocks are used to send binary signals integers real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals 16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT 1 to PCFCNT 16 are available in the IEDs The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 516 The formula for calculating the LON address...

Page 720: ...Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3 Analog value M15083 135 v4 All analog values are reported cyclic The reporting interval is taken ...

Page 721: ...and BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block comma...

Page 722: ...WI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block command BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block command CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL...

Page 723: ...for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel command CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA param...

Page 724: ...I 5393 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select Open Close command SELECTOpen 00 SELECTClose 01 so on SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA p...

Page 725: ...52 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate Op...

Page 726: ...06 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate Open Close command ExcOpen 00 ExcClose 01 so on SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate Op...

Page 727: ... 179 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be substit...

Page 728: ...Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be substituted Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for sub...

Page 729: ...I 197 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute enable com...

Page 730: ...le SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute enable command Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update ...

Page 731: ...03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block command Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block command Update Blo...

Page 732: ...ork variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs The supported network variable type is SNVT_state NV type 83 SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values Multiple command send function block MULTICMDSND is used to pack the information to one value This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multip...

Page 733: ...ns New en05000719 vsd IEC05000719 V1 EN US Figure 355 The network variables window in LNT There are two ways of downloading NV connections Either the users can use the drag and drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there or they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu Configuration ...

Page 734: ... a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital conversion module ADM and it is used for LON SPA IEC 60870 5 103 and DNP communication In the following figure X311 ports A B are for SPA IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C D are for LON protocol Section 17 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Station communication 728 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 735: ...connectors This is identified by a tag Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of fibre cables 17 6 4 Technical data IP14442 1 v1 M11927 1 v2 Table 518 LON communication protocol Function Value Protocol LON Communication speed 1 25 Mbit s 1MRK...

Page 736: ...Opto electrical converter for the PC PC SPA cannot be accessed via PCM600 When communicating between the local HMI and a PC the only hardware required is a front connection cable SPA can be accessed via LHMI front only when using the Field Service Tool Access FSTACCS 17 7 3 Settings IP14403 1 v2 PID 6195 SETTINGS v5 Table 519 SPA Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Descrip...

Page 737: ... for example for event information or only on demand The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages Furthermore the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical 1 SPA protocol M11880 10 v5 The tables below specify the SPA add...

Page 738: ...6 binary output signals each The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station remote control gateway or from the local HMI on the IED For Single command 3 signals function block SINGLECMD 1 to SINGLECMD 3 the address is for the first output The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one For example output 7 on the SINGLECMD 2 function block has the 5O533 address The...

Page 739: ...84 5 O 539 SINGLECMD2 Cmd14 4 S 4685 5 O 540 SINGLECMD2 Cmd15 4 S 4686 5 O 541 SINGLECMD2 Cmd16 4 S 4687 5 O 542 SINGLECMD3 Cmd1 4 S 4705 5 O 543 SINGLECMD3 Cmd2 4 S 4706 5 O 544 SINGLECMD3 Cmd3 4 S 4707 5 O 545 SINGLECMD3 Cmd4 4 S 4708 5 O 546 SINGLECMD3 Cmd5 4 S 4709 5 O 547 SINGLECMD3 Cmd6 4 S 4710 5 O 548 SINGLECMD3 Cmd7 4 S 4711 5 O 549 SINGLECMD3 Cmd8 4 S 4712 5 O 550 SINGLECMD3 Cmd9 4 S 471...

Page 740: ...s to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD 1 are shown in table 522 SINGLECMD BLOCK OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 AND INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 OUT NOUT PULSETIMER INPUT OUT CD01 CMDOUT1 CD01 CMDOUT2 CD01 CMDOUT3 CD01 CMDOUT4 CD01 CMDOUT5 CD01 CMDOUT6 CD01 CMDOUT7 CD01 CMDOUT15 CD01 CMDOUT16 CD01 CMDOUT8 CD01 CMDOUT9 CD01 CMDOUT10 CD...

Page 741: ...T 1 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 22O1 22O2 22O3 22O4 22O5 22O6 22O7 22O8 22O9 22O10 22O11 22O12 22O13 22O14 22O15 22O16 22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63 22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 ...

Page 742: ...ection signals for event handling 17 7 4 1 Communication ports M11880 315 v6 The serial communication module SLM is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital conversion module ADM It is used for LON SPA IEC 60870 5 103 and DNP communication In the following figure X311 ports A B are for SPA IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C D are for LON protocol Section 17 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Station com...

Page 743: ...ceiver input and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of fibre cables For setting the transfer rate baud rate and slave number please refer to the Application manual and Commissioning manual respectively 17 7 5 Technical data IP14404 1 v1 M11901 1 v2 Table 524 SPA communication protocol Function Value P...

Page 744: ...e generated 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected IL2 IL3 UL1 UL2 UL3 P Q F are optional but there can be no holes 3 4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present 3 3 Will be generated if IL2 Ul1L2 P and Q present 3 2 Will be generated if IL2 UL1L2 and P or Q missing 3 1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing otherwise IL2 in 9 Description for I103MEAS function block 9 IL1 3 4 ...

Page 745: ... UL2 REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase L2 UL3 REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase L3 UL1L2 REAL 0 0 Service value for voltage phase phase L1 L2 UN REAL 0 0 Service value for residual voltage UN P REAL 0 0 Service value for active power Q REAL 0 0 Service value for reactive power F REAL 0 0 Service value for system frequency 17 8 2 5 Settings PID 6625 SETTINGS v4 Table 526 I103MEAS Non ...

Page 746: ...MEASUSR 17 8 3 1 Functionality GUID FC9ED4BD F11C 4BDA 8CDB 3ACF00931D3A v1 I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range and the Information number parameter for each block 17 8 3 2 Identification GUID A9E21066 354B 453D 8D9B E86EE31CF5F9 v1 Function description F...

Page 747: ...t Description FunctionType 1 255 1 25 Function type 1 255 InfNo 1 255 1 1 Information number for measurands 1 255 MaxMeasur1 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 1 MaxMeasur2 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 2 MaxMeasur3 0 05 10000000000 00 0 05 1000 00 Maximum value for measurement on input 3 MaxMeasur4 0 05 10000000000 00 ...

Page 748: ...k GUID FAC5A3DF 73CB 4A39 A213 5C21ACA05756 v1 I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_BLKD IEC10000289 2 en vsd IEC10000289 V2 EN US Figure 363 I103AR function block 17 8 4 4 Signals PID 3973 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 529 I103AR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16 auto recloser active 128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information ...

Page 749: ...atus earth fault for IEC 60870 5 103 I103EF 17 8 5 3 Function block GUID 25B47484 2976 4063 BD81 AE02D03B08B0 v1 IEC10000290 1 en vsd I103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV IEC10000290 V1 EN US Figure 364 I103EF function block 17 8 5 4 Signals PID 3974 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 531 I103EF Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number ...

Page 750: ...and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC 60870 5 103 I103FLTPROT 17 8 6 2 Identification GUID 55593EC4 7AED 47A0 8311 DB22D013A193 v1 Function description Function block name IEC 6061...

Page 751: ...CK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64 start phase L1 65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65 start phase L2 66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66 start phase L3 67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67 start residual current IN 68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68 trip general 69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69 trip phase L1 70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Info...

Page 752: ...m phase L1 87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87 trip measuring system phase L2 88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88 trip measuring system phase L3 89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89 trip measuring system neutral N 90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90 over current trip stage low 91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91 over current trip stage high 92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92...

Page 753: ..._SETCH 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 IEC10000292 2 en vsd IEC10000292 V2 EN US Figure 366 I103IED function block 17 8 7 4 Signals PID 3975 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 535 I103IED Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting 19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19 reset LEDs 21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21 test mode is active 22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Informa...

Page 754: ... Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Supervison status for IEC 60870 5 103 I103SUPERV 17 8 8 3 Function block GUID 69C2C974 2D64 4174 9F9A 15383C09050D v1 IEC10000293 1 en vsd I103SUPERV BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL IEC10000293 V1 EN US Figure 367 I103SUPERV function block 17 8 8 4 Signals PID 3976 INPUTSIGNALS...

Page 755: ...AC3CD4 v3 I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction Each instance is associated with a Function Type FUN and each input signal with an Information Number INF Additionally all input signals may be defined to use relative time and how to respond to a GI request The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all connected in...

Page 756: ... 3 INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4 INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5 INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6 INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7 INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8 RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time GUID 9E29DE39 EA74 4D62 A2BA F8E31A3D8757 v2 RT_START registers the positive transition 0 1 of a pulse and sets the time from which relative time is ...

Page 757: ...solute Type identification TYP TypNo2 Absolute Relative Absolute Type identification TYP TypNo3 Absolute Relative Absolute Type identification TYP TypNo4 Absolute Relative Absolute Type identification TYP TypNo5 Absolute Relative Absolute Type identification TYP TypNo6 Absolute Relative Absolute Type identification TYP TypNo7 Absolute Relative Absolute Type identification TYP TypNo8 Absolute Relat...

Page 758: ...of the IEC 60870 5 103 standard The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not Refer to the IEC 60870 5 103 standard for details 17 8 10 Function commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103CMD 17 8 10 1 Functionality GUID 973929FE 292B 42A5 ACF9 BC95E2B16AE1 v2 I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre defined output signals The signals are in...

Page 759: ... Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 17 8 11 IED commands for IEC 60870 5 103 I103IEDCMD 17 8 11 1 Functionality GUID 19AD44B2 21D6 4DB0 AD74 1578DA30C100 v5 I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored Pulse length is fixed to 400ms 17 8 11 2 Identification GUID 0...

Page 760: ... group 2 25 GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25 activate setting group 3 26 GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26 activate setting group 4 17 8 11 5 Settings PID 3788 SETTINGS v5 Table 546 I103IEDCMD Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 255 Function type 1 255 17 8 12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870 5 103 I103USRCMD 17 8 12 1 Functi...

Page 761: ...71 I103USRCMD function block 17 8 12 4 Signals PID 3790 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 547 I103USRCMD Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands PID 3790 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 548 I103USRCMD Output signals Name Type Description OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1 OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2 OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3 OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLE...

Page 762: ...ity GUID 729E9AFD 0468 4BBD B54A A6CDCC68A9B2 v3 I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870 5 103 The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double point command schemes The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON OFF or 2 steady ON OFF outputs The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2 while the OFF ...

Page 763: ...nit Step Default Description FunctionType 1 255 1 1 Function type 1 255 PulseLength 0 000 60 000 s 0 001 0 400 Pulse length InfNo 1 255 1 1 Information number for command output 1 255 17 8 14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870 5 103 I103POSCMD 17 8 14 1 Functionality GUID 1E40B94D B6A6 42F0 8757 A47B8A3FA3CD v7 I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its inp...

Page 764: ... INF 2 and 3 respectively The base INF Information Number parameter is an IEC 60870 5 103 identifier that associates a function in a 103 Master such as Scada with its equivalent in the IED 17 8 14 2 Identification GUID ABF81C27 4605 4A15 9CF5 77FF82DE8747 v1 Function description Function block name IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number IED commands with position and select for IEC...

Page 765: ... and faulty is reported spontaneously However the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position Off See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information When input BLOCK is ON the function ignores GI requests and ceases all monitoring activity Consequently no transitions will be detected The I103POSCMDV function is also equ...

Page 766: ...6 Operation principle IP14407 1 v3 17 8 16 1 General M11874 3 v5 IEC 60870 5 103 is an unbalanced master slave protocol for coded bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit s In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave The communication is based on a point to point principle The master ...

Page 767: ...ifferent cycle times for function blocks must be considered to ensure correct time stamping Commands in control direction M11874 27 v1 Commands in control direction I103IEDCMD M11874 29 v6 Command block in control direction with defined output signals Number of instances 1 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number is defined for each output signals Table 557 I103IEDC...

Page 768: ...ted for each output signal Default values are 1 8 Table 559 I103USRCMD supported indications INF 1 Description 1 Output signal 01 2 Output signal 02 3 Output signal 03 4 Output signal 04 5 Output signal 05 6 Output signal 06 7 Output signal 07 8 Output signal 08 1 User defined information number Status M11874 107 v1 Terminal status indications in monitor direction I103IED M11874 109 v7 Indication ...

Page 769: ...DEF Information number default values INF Description GI TYP COT 11 Input signal 01 x 1 2 1 7 9 2 Input signal 02 x 1 2 1 7 9 3 Input signal 03 x 1 2 1 7 9 4 Input signal 04 x 1 2 1 7 9 5 Input signal 05 x 1 2 1 7 9 6 Input signal 06 x 1 2 1 7 9 7 Input signal 07 x 1 2 1 7 9 8 Input signal 08 x 1 2 1 7 9 1 User defined information number Supervision indications in monitor direction I103SUPERV M118...

Page 770: ...h fault forward 52 Earth fault reverse Autorecloser indications in monitor direction I103AR M11874 363 v6 Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions Number of instances 1 Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType Information number is defined for each output signal Table 564 I103AR supported indications INF Description 16 Autorecloser active 128 CB on...

Page 771: ... Y 1 7 9 85 Breaker failure 2 N 1 7 86 Trip measuring system phase L1 2 N 1 7 87 Trip measuring system phase L2 2 N 1 7 88 Trip measuring system phase L3 2 N 1 7 89 Trip measuring system neutral N 2 N 1 7 90 Over current trip stage low 2 N 1 7 91 Over current trip stage high 2 N 1 7 92 Earth fault trip stage low 2 N 1 7 93 Earth fault trip stage high 2 N 1 7 Measurands M11874 382 v2 Function block...

Page 772: ...difference You can configure client client scaled max 1 2 rated or client scaled max 1 0 maxVal If the client has a hard coded gain of 1 2 rated then client scaled max 1 2 times maxVal 1 2 Resolution is maxVal 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy Table 566 I103MEAS supported indications INF Description 148 IL1 144 145 146 148 IL2 148 IL3 147 IN Neutral current 148 UL1...

Page 773: ...nected 1 2 that is only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted Disturbance recordings M11874 467 v7 The following elements are used in the ASDUs Application Service Data Units defined in the standard Analog signals 40 channels the channel number for each channel has to be specified Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR ...

Page 774: ...oad is specified by the standard however some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances ASDU23 an information element named SOF status of fault exists This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether Bit TP...

Page 775: ...r M11874 482 v3 Supported Electrical Interface EIA RS 485 Yes number of loads 32 Optical interface glass fibre Yes plastic fibre Transmission speed 9600 bit s Yes 19200 bit s Yes Link Layer DFC bit used Yes Connectors connector F SMA No connector BFOC 2 5 Yes Interoperability application layer M11874 524 v3 Supported Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction ASDU Yes 1 Time tagged messag...

Page 776: ...c services No 17 8 16 2 Communication ports M11874 626 v3 The serial communication module SLM is used for SPA IEC 60870 5 103 DNP and LON communication This module is a mezzanine module and is placed assembled on the Numerical module NUM The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables snap in or two glass fibre cables ST bayonet or a combination of plastic and glas...

Page 777: ...CMDSND takes 16 binary inputs LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block MULTICMDRCV which has 16 binary outputs 17 9 2 Design SEMOD119958 1 v1 17 9 2 1 General M14792 3 v3 The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes Steady or Pulse 1 Steady This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs 2 Pulse W...

Page 778: ... SEMOD120009 4 v2 IEC06000008 2 en vsd MULTICMDSND BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR IEC06000008 V2 EN US Figure 376 MULTICMDSND function block 17 9 4 Signals SEMOD119963 1 v2 PID 400 INPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 569 MULTICMDRCV Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function Se...

Page 779: ...EAN 0 Input 15 INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 PID 400 OUTPUTSIGNALS v10 Table 571 MULTICMDRCV Output signals Name Type Description ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 OUT...

Page 780: ...lt Description tMaxCycleTime 0 000 200 000 s 0 001 5 000 Maximum time interval between transmission of output data tMinCycleTime 0 000 200 000 s 0 001 0 000 Minimum time interval between transmission of output data 17 9 6 Operation principle M14793 3 v3 There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block The first two are fast 8 ms cycle time while the others are slow 100 ms cycle time Each i...

Page 781: ...f the generated security event 17 10 1 2 Settings PID 3430 SETTINGS v6 Table 576 SECALARM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On On Operation On Off 17 11 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG 17 11 1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID BED7C3D6 6BE3 4DAC 84B3 92239E819CC0 v1 ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging There can be 6 external lo...

Page 782: ...4 External log server 3 port number ExtLogSrv3IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 3 IP address ExtLogSrv4Type Off SYSLOG UDP IP SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Off External log server 4 type ExtLogSrv4Port 1 65535 1 514 External log server 4 port number ExtLogSrv4IP 0 18 IP Address 1 127 0 0 1 External log server 4 IP address ExtLogSrv5Type Off SYSLOG UDP IP SYSLOG TCP IP CEF TCP IP Off Ex...

Page 783: ...ard the interests of our customers both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED are protected by means of authorization handling The authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED local through the local HMI remote through the communication ports The IED users can be created deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool 1MRK 506 ...

Page 784: ...cess or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality The pre defined user types are given in Table 578 Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600 The meaning of the legends used in the table R Read W Write No access rights Section 18 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Security 778 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Techn...

Page 785: ...W R R R R W R W File loading database loading from XML file R W R W R W File dumping database dumping to XML file R W R W R W File transfer FTP file transfer R W R W R W R W R W File transfer limited FTP file transfer R R W R R W R W R W R W File Transfer SPA File Transfer R W R W Database access for normal user R R W R R W R W R W R W User administration user management FTP File Transfer R R W R ...

Page 786: ... perform an operation that is password protected the Log on window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field so upon pressing the key the user can change the user name by browsing the list of users with the up and down arrows After choosing the right user name the user must press the E key again When it comes to password upon pressing the key the following character will show up...

Page 787: ...ole explanation User rights VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform control actions ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED and also run commands and manage disturbances INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED SECADM...

Page 788: ... log in to the IED If user replication has been disabled in a CAM enabled IED and if communication with SDM600 is lost access to that IED will be denied until communication is re established All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using secure communication Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute certificates during the engineering process ...

Page 789: ...u log on time out 18 2 3 Settings PID 6837 SETTINGS v2 Table 582 AUTHMAN Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description MaintMenuEnable Disable Enable Enable Maintenance menu enable AuthTimeout 600 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout 18 3 FTP access with password FTPACCS 18 3 1 Identification GUID C037D0B0 1AA0 4592 9293 92C7EDED3261 v1 Function description IEC 6185...

Page 790: ...n group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SSLMode FTP FTPS FTPS FTPS Support for AUTH TLS SSL TCPPortFTP 1 65535 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit SSL PasvPortStart 0 65515 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV PasvPortEnd 0 65535 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV 18 4 Authority status ATHSTAT 18 4 1 Identification GUID 79C63688 4D7D 4954 AC3C B9484D084F6F v...

Page 791: ...n does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 18 4 6 Operation principle SEMOD158543 4 v5 Authority status ATHSTAT function informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked the output USRBLKED the fact that at least one user is lo...

Page 792: ...dx IEC09000787 V2 EN US Figure 379 INTERRSIG function block 18 5 3 Signals IP9674 1 v2 PID 4077 OUTPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 585 INTERRSIG Output signals Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block 18 5 4 Settings ABBD8E15533 v3 The function doe...

Page 793: ...The information from the self supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600 IEC15000414 2 en vsdx IEC15000414 V2 EN US Figure 380 IED general status in local HM The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list A maximum of 40 internal events are stored in a first in first out manner GUID B481701F 05B4 4B29 83D4 18F13886FEBE V1 EN US Figure 381 S...

Page 794: ...Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware configuration see table 587 Table 586 Self supervision s standard internal signals Name of signal Description Displayed on local HMI as Reasons for activation FAIL Internal Fail status Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active LMDERROR WATCHDOG APPERROR RTEERROR or...

Page 795: ...RPCHGD Setting groups changed Settings changed This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed Table 587 Self supervision s hardware dependent internal signals Card Name of signal Description Displayed on local HMI as Reasons for activation PSM PSM Error Power Supply Module Error status PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error BIM B...

Page 796: ...er channels can be performed If the validation fails the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A D converter failure 18 5 6 Technical data IP10272 1 v2 M11963 1 v5 Table 588 Self supervision with internal event list Data Value Recording manner Continuous event controlled List size 40 events first in first out 18 6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK GUID E8A1C33A DD65 42B5 BA13 CFAE40C2C9AD ...

Page 797: ...k override 18 6 4 Operation principle GUID 74581AA2 6EB4 4CFA 92DA 90FB89F9A62C v3 The Change lock function CHNGLCK is configured using ACT The function when activated will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED Monitoring Reading events Resetting events Reading disturbance data Clear disturbances Reset LEDs Reset counters and other runtim...

Page 798: ...allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device All inbound network traffic is quota controlled so that a too heavy network load can be controlled Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network The denial of service functionality in FRONSTATUS SCHLCCH and RCHLCCH measures the IED load from communication and if necessary limits...

Page 799: ...The DOS functionality activates when the inbound traffic rate exceeds 3000 packets per second 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 18 Security Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 793 Technical manual ...

Page 800: ...794 ...

Page 801: ...o SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source 19 1 2 Settings IP9657 1 v2 SEMOD55141 5 v6 There are two groups of parameter settings related to time System time Synchronization The System time group relates to setting the on off and start end of the Daylight Saving Time DST for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time UTC The Synchronization group rela...

Page 802: ...hen time synchronization quality is inadequate SyncAccLevel Class T5 1us Class T4 4us Unspecified Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy CurrentSyncSource 0 16 1 Current synchronization source PTPGMId 0 16 1 PTP Grand Master Id PTPGMClass 0 16 1 PTP Grand Master Class PTPGMPriority1 0 16 1 PTP Grand Master Prio 1 PTPGMPriority2 0 16 1 PTP Grand Master Prio 2 PTPGMAccuracy 0 16 1 PTP Gran...

Page 803: ...gative edge detection PID 6608 SETTINGS v4 Table 593 SNTP Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description ServerIP Add 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Server IP address RedServIP Add 0 18 IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Redundant server IP address LocalPort 0 65535 1 49152 Port number in the IED to communicate with the SNTP server PID 6212 SETTINGS v5 Table 594 DSTENABLE Non group settings...

Page 804: ... daylight time starts DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time starts UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time starts Section 19 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Basic IED functions 798 Line distance prote...

Page 805: ...when daylight time ends DayInWeek Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends WeekInMonth Last First Second Third Fourth Last Week in month when daylight time ends UTCTimeOfDay 24 00 23 30 00 30 00 00 00 30 48 00 1 00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time ends 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 19 Basic IED functions Line distance protection RE...

Page 806: ... 11 00 11 30 12 00 12 45 13 00 14 00 1 00 Local time from UTC PID 5187 SETTINGS v5 Table 598 IRIG B Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description SynchType BNC Opto Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard Section 19 1M...

Page 807: ...eration principle IP12360 1 v4 19 1 3 1 General concepts M11346 77 v1 Time definitions M11346 80 v3 The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock and the time the clock is intended to have Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error that is the time gained or lost by the clock A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them Design of the t...

Page 808: ...it reaches the event recorder The hardware clock can thus run independently The echo mode of the line differential protection function is based on the hardware clock Thus there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock Synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when IRIG B 00X with optical fibre IEEE 1344 is used for differential protect...

Page 809: ...ynchronization mode is used This prevents the hardware clock to make too big a time steps 16 µs emanating from the requirement of correct timing in the line differential protection function Synchronization principle M11346 83 v4 From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower l...

Page 810: ...ynchronization which means for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages a spike filter in the IED removes this time message If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has a large offset the spike filter does not act and the offset in the s...

Page 811: ...an accuracy that gives 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs The IED itself can be set as an SNTP time server SNTP provides complete time information and can be used as both fine and coarse time synch source However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only SNTP server requirements GUID 588FCD12 C494 445E 8488 8287B34EFD9A v4 The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network that is not ...

Page 812: ...esigned and used for synchronization of the IEDs The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse As only the flanks are detected the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency ...

Page 813: ...atically rejected The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter The third pulse will set the time if the time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time if the time offset is small enough If the time is set the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set If the time is adjusted the time will reach its destination within one minute Synchronization via ...

Page 814: ...the merging unit to the IED is required For instance FineSyncSource is set to the same source that the merging unit uses 19 1 3 5 Precision Time Protocol PTP GUID 4F2B68B8 CCC8 4173 A644 D1674D3146F8 v1 PTP according to IEEE 1588 2008 and specifically its profile IEC IEEE 61850 9 3 for power utility automation is a synchronization method that differs from SNTP for instance by providing much better...

Page 815: ...GM accuracy and OffsetScaledVariance are the same for all devices 6 Identity that is the MAC adress of the port MAC address of the access points can be seen in LHMI under the settings of each access point To setup a PTP network with no obvious Grand Master you simply connect the IEDs to one network and configure PTP to be on on all IEDs On one IED the one from which you want to set the time in the...

Page 816: ...ly adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios 19 2 2 Function block IP9661 1 v1 M12010 3 v3 ACTVGRP ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD REMSETEN IEC05000433 3 en vsd IEC05000433 V3 EN US Figure 386 ActiveGroup function block 19 2 3 Signals IP14073 1 v2 PID 6558 INPUTSIGNALS v6 Table 602 ACTVGRP Input signals Name Type ...

Page 817: ...tiveGroup function has six functional inputs each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group Eight functional output signals are available for configuration purposes so that information on the active setting group is always available A setting group is selected by using the local HMI from a front connected persona...

Page 818: ...61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the IEC 61850 8 1 configuration under Main menu Configuration Communication Station communication IEC 61850 8 1 IEC 61850 8 1 Please refer to documentation for IEC 61850 for further details Switching can only be done within that number of groups The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will...

Page 819: ...ally set and configured values within the IED No settings will be changed thus mistakes are avoided Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test mode 19 3 2 Function block SEMOD54888 4 v5 TESTMODE IED_TEST TEST IED_TEST BLOCK NOEVENT INPUT SETTING IEC61850 IEC14000072 1 en vsd IEC09000219 V2 EN US Figure 388 TESTMODE function block 19 3 3 Signals IP9680 1...

Page 820: ...t SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE setting TestMode to On in the local HMI under Main menu TEST IED test mode While the IED is in test mode the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the Test mode being in On state If the input from the configuration OUTPUT signal is activated or setting from local HMI SETTING si...

Page 821: ... M15324 3 v6 IED identifiers TERMINALID function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system not only in the substation but in a whole region or a country Use only characters A Z a z and 0 9 in station object and unit names 19 4 2 Settings GUID 3C49A222 FFE4 492B A96C 9E9965FA2CB4 v2 PID 6801 SETTINGS v1 Table 608 TERMINALID Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Def...

Page 822: ...gs M11789 39 v10 The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the case of maintenance repair interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer They can only be viewed The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu Diagnostics IED status Product...

Page 823: ...mple 128 meaning line protection SerialNo OrderingNo ProductionDate 19 6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793 1 v2 19 6 1 Functionality M15302 3 v5 The Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI function is used within the Application Configuration Tool ACT in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in f...

Page 824: ...y input 5 BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9 BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10 19 6 4 Operation principle M15305 3 v5 The Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI function see figure 389 receives its inputs from the real hardware binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool SMT or ACT and makes them available to the rest of the configurat...

Page 825: ...MOD55887 1 v2 PID 3831 INPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 611 SMBO Input signals Name Type Default Description BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal n...

Page 826: ... calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude phase angle frequency true RMS value harmonics sequence components and so on This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT for example protection measurement or monitoring functions 19 8 2 Function block SEMOD55766 1 v2 SEMOD54868 4 v11 SMAI1 BLOCK DFTSPFC REVROT GRP1L1 GRP1L2 G...

Page 827: ...20 0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1 GRP1L1 STRING First analog input used for phase L1 or L1 L2 quantity GRP1L2 STRING Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2 L3 quantity GRP1L3 STRING Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3 L1 quantity GRP1N STRING Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity PID 3405 ...

Page 828: ...h analog input used for residual or neutral quantity PID 3406 OUTPUTSIGNALS v5 Table 615 SMAI2 Output signals Name Type Description G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 phase group G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1 G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2 G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3 G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4 G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual...

Page 829: ...DFTRef DFTRefGrp1 DFTRefGrp2 DFTRefGrp3 DFTRefGrp4 DFTRefGrp5 DFTRefGrp6 DFTRefGrp7 DFTRefGrp8 DFTRefGrp9 DFTRefGrp10 DFTRefGrp11 DFTRefGrp12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef DFT reference ConnectionType Ph N Ph Ph Ph N Input connection type AnalogInputType Voltage Current Voltage Analog input signal type Table 617 SMAI1 Non group settings advanced Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Ne...

Page 830: ...og signals three phases and one neutral or residual value either voltage or current see figure 391 and figure 392 SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired phase angle RMS value frequency and frequency derivates etc 244 values in total The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero if BLOCK is TRUE 1 System phase rotation and frequency are defined us...

Page 831: ...RPxL2 L3 L1 to GRPxL3 If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph N all three inputs GRPxL1 GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage If only one phase phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph Ph the user is advised to connect two not three of the inputs GRPxL1 GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 393 to make ...

Page 832: ...hose IED functions that might need it 19 9 2 Function block SEMOD54885 4 v3 3PHSUM BLOCK REVROT G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 IEC05000441 3 en vsdx IEC05000441 V3 EN US Figure 394 3PHSUM function block 19 9 3 Signals SEMOD55989 1 v2 PID 6428 INPUTSIGNALS v3 Table 620 3PHSUM Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1 BLKGR2 BOOLEA...

Page 833: ...ence shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available PID 6428 SETTINGS v3 Table 622 3PHSUM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description GlobalBaseSel 1 12 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value groups SummationType Group1 Group2 Group1 Group2 Group2 Group1 Group1 Group2 Group1 Group2 Summation type DFTReference InternalDFTRef DFTRefGrp1...

Page 834: ...f global values consists of values for current voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updating values when necessary Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter GlobalBa...

Page 835: ...tation direction are set under Main menu Configuration Power system Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree 19 11 3 Settings PID 1626 SETTINGS v17 Table 625 PRIMVAL Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Frequency 50 0 60 0 Hz 10 0 50 0 Rated system frequency PhaseRotation Normal L1L2L3 Inverse L3L2L1 Normal L1L2L3 System phase rotation 1...

Page 836: ...830 ...

Page 837: ...0 1 1 Variants of case size with local HMI display M15024 3 v5 IEC04000458 2 en psd IEC04000458 V2 EN US Figure 395 1 2 19 case with local HMI display 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 831 Technical manual ...

Page 838: ... P30 6 Rear view X11 X31 X41 X51 X401 X301 X302 X303 X304 X311 A B C D X305 X312 X306 X313 X32 X42 X52 6U IEC17000067 V1 EN US Rear position Module X11 PSM X31 and X32 etc to X51 and X52 BIM BOM or IOM X301 X302 X303 X304 SFP X305 LDCM X306 LDCM X311 A B C D SLM X312 X313 LDCM IRIG B or RS485 X401 TRM Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 832 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical ...

Page 839: ...als processed by the NUM Carrier for communication boards Combined backplane module CBM The module has two main purposes to distribute supply voltages from the PSM to the other modules and to act as a communication carrier via its two buses CompactPCI for fast I O and communication and CAN for slow I O Universal backplane module UBM The module is used to interconnect the TRM and the ADM It also co...

Page 840: ... LC or galvanic type RJ45 Ethernet ports one basic and three optional 20 2 2 2 Functionality M12644 3 v5 The numeric module NUM is a high performance CPU module based on a dual core processor It is 6U high and occupies one slot Contact with the backplane is achieved via a compact PCI connector and an euro connector The NUM has two PC MIP expansion slots where mezzanine cards such as the LDCM can b...

Page 841: ...tor Type RJ45 Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s GUID 96676D5D 0835 44DA BC22 058FD18BDF34 v2 Table 631 NUM Communication ports NUM 4 Ethernet ports 1 Basic 3 Optional Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45 20 2 3 Power supply module PSM IP15594 1 v1 20 2 3 1 Introduction M11595 3 v6 The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isola...

Page 842: ...Power consumption 32 W typically Auxiliary DC power in rush 10 A during 0 1 s 20 2 4 Local human machine interface Local HMI SEMOD56218 5 v4 Refer to section Local HMI for information 20 2 5 Transformer input module TRM IP15581 1 v1 20 2 5 1 Introduction M14875 3 v9 The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measurin...

Page 843: ...uld not be used with current transformers intended for protection purposes due to limitations in overload characteristics The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM For configuration of the input and output signals refer to section Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI 1MRK006501 AF TRM IEC 6502P1 V1 EN US Figure 397 TRM connection diagram 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance prote...

Page 844: ... 0 340 V Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s 420 V continuously Burden 20 mVA at 110 V 80 mVA at 220 V all values for individual voltage inputs Note All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency 20 2 6 Analog digital conversion module ADM IP14285 1 v2 20 2 6 1 Introduction M13664 3 v5 The Analog digital conversion module ADM has 12 analog inputs two PC MIP slots and one ...

Page 845: ...ut current In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A D converter Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency The A D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module NUM with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1 2 kHz at 60 Hz system...

Page 846: ...annel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 1 2v 2 5v level shift en05000474 vsd IEC05000474 V1 EN US Figure 398 The ADM layout Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 840 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 847: ...figuration of the input signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals When blocked a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency making it possible to use the input for pulse counting The blocking frequency may also be set Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operatio...

Page 848: ...eration uncertain No operation This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module NUM The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input despite the low steady state power consumption which is shown in figure 400 and 401 Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 842 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 849: ...t for the standard version of BIM en07000105 1 vsd 50 5 5 ms mA IEC07000105 V2 EN US Figure 401 Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 843 Technical manual ...

Page 850: ...N Binary input module status BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4 value BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5 value BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 value Table continues on next page Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 844 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 851: ... 2 7 4 Settings PID 3473 SETTINGS v2 Table 636 BIM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On On Operation Off On DebounceTime 0 001 0 020 s 0 001 0 001 Debounce time for binary inputs OscBlock 1 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit OscRelease 1 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit 20 2 7 5 Monitored data PID 3473 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 637 BIM Monitore...

Page 852: ...le with enhanced pulse counting capabilities Quantity Rated value Nominal range Binary inputs 16 DC voltage RL 24 30 V 48 60 V 110 125 V 220 250 V RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 RL 20 Power consumption 24 30 V 48 60 V 110 125 V 220 250 V max 0 05 W input max 0 1 W input max 0 2 W input max 0 4 W input Counter input frequency 10 pulses s max Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses s max Oscillating signal di...

Page 853: ...rip and closing coils If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current a parallel reinforcement is required For configuration of the output signals refer to section Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO xx00000299 vsd 2 1 3 Output module IEC00000299 V1 EN US Figure 403 Relay pair example 1 Output connection from relay 1 2 O...

Page 854: ...put 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7 BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8 BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9 BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10 BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11 BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12 Table continues on next page Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 848 Line distanc...

Page 855: ...part of IOM module status 20 2 8 4 Settings PID 3439 SETTINGS v2 Table 642 BOM Non group settings basic Name Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation Off On On Operation Off On 20 2 8 5 Monitored data PID 3439 MONITOREDDATA v2 Table 643 BOM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Ok 1 Error Binary output part of IOM module status BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0...

Page 856: ...BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 5 status BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 6 value BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 6 force BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 6 status BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 7 value BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 7 force BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 7 status BO8...

Page 857: ...locked Binary output 12 status BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 13 value BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 13 force BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 13 status BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 14 value BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 14 force BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 14 status BO15VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0...

Page 858: ... Blocked Binary output 19 status BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 20 value BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 20 force BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 20 status BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 21 value BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 21 force BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 21 status BO22VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1...

Page 859: ...n continuous 8 A 10 A 12 A Making capacity at inductive load with L R 10 ms 0 2 s 1 0 s 30 A 10 A Breaking capacity for AC cos j 0 4 250 V 8 0 A Breaking capacity for DC with L R 40 ms 48 V 1 A 110 V 0 4 A 125 V 0 35 A 220 V 0 2 A 250 V 0 15 A Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within nominal range After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated The ac...

Page 860: ...input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth faults see figure 399 The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered I O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present M1898 3 v3 The binary I O module IOM has eight...

Page 861: ... on SEMOD175370 4 v1 The binary input output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input output module 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 855 Technical ...

Page 862: ...ue BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning PID 4049 INPUTSIGNALS v2 Table 646 IOMOUT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1 BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2 BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3 BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4 BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5 BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6 BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary outp...

Page 863: ...MOUT Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 1 value BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 1 force BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 1 status BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 2 value BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 2 force BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 2 status BO3VAL...

Page 864: ...ocked Binary output 7 status BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 8 value BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 8 force BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 8 status BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary output 9 value BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced Binary output 9 force BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Normal 1 Forced 2 Blocked Binary output 9 status BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1 1 0 0 Binary outp...

Page 865: ... 0 05 W input max 0 1 W input max 0 2 W input max 0 4 W input max 0 5 W input Counter input frequency 10 pulses s max Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1 40 Hz Release settable 1 30 Hz Debounce filter Settable 1 20 ms M12318 1 v8 Table 651 IOM Binary input output module contact data reference standard IEC 61810 2 Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays paral...

Page 866: ...quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays parallel reed relay Binary outputs IOM 10 IOM 2 Max system voltage 250 V AC DC 250 V DC Test voltage across open contact 1 min 250 V rms 250 V rms Current carrying capacity Per relay continuous Per relay 1 s Per process connector pin continuous 8 A 10 A 12 A 8 A 10 A 12 A Making capacity at inductive loadwith L R 10 ms 0 2 s 1 0 s 30 A 10 A 0 4 A ...

Page 867: ...tory mounted as a mezzanine card on the first Analog digital conversion module ADM Three variants of SLM are available with different combinations of optical fiber connectors see figure 407 The plastic fiber connectors are of snap in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type 1 2 3 4 I E C 0 5 0 0 7 6 0 1 e n O r i g i n a l p s d IEC05000760 V2 EN US Figure 407 SLM variants component side...

Page 868: ...c fiber 7 dB 25m 80ft m typically Fiber diameter Glass fiber 62 5 125 mm Plastic fiber 1 mm depending on optical budget calculation 20 2 11 Galvanic RS485 communication module SEMOD174899 1 v1 20 2 11 1 Introduction SEMOD158664 5 v3 The Galvanic RS485 communication module RS485 is used for DNP3 0 and IEC 60870 5 103 communication The module has one RS485 communication port The RS485 is a balanced ...

Page 869: ...t high 2 RS485 TX Receive transmit 3 Term T Term Termination resistor for transmitter and receiver in 2 wir case connect to TX 4 N A R Term Termination resistor for receiver connect to RX 5 N A RX Receive low 6 N A RX Receive high Screw terminal X3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Screw terminal X1 Backplane Angle bracket RS485 PWB IEC06000517 V1 EN US Figure 408 RS485 connector 2 wire Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and p...

Page 870: ...he IRIG B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station clock The precision time protocol PTP IEC IEEE 61850 9 3 input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC UCA 61850 9 2LE is used Electrical BNC and optical connection ST for 0XX and 12X IRIG B support 20 2 12 2 Design SEMOD141098 4 v4 The IRIG B module has two inputs One input is for the IRIG B tha...

Page 871: ...ype BNC Opto Opto Type of synchronization TimeDomain LocalTime UTC LocalTime Time domain Encoding IRIG B 1344 1344TZ IRIG B Type of encoding TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ PlusTZ PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard 20 2 12 4 Technical data SEMOD141132 1 v1 SEMOD141136 2 v8 Table 658 IRIG B Quantity Rated value Number of channels IRIG B 1 Number of optical channels 1 Electrical connector Electrical connec...

Page 872: ...mpedance 100 k ohm Optical connector Optical connector IRIG B Type ST Type of fibre 62 5 125 μm multimode fibre Supported formats IRIG B 00x Accuracy 1μs 20 3 Dimensions IP11490 1 v3 20 3 1 Case with rear cover SEMOD53199 1 v1 M11985 110 v4 IEC05000501 V2 EN US Figure 410 Case with rear cover Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 866 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 873: ...gure 412 Rear cover case with details M11985 120 v4 Case size mm A B C D E F G H J K 6U 1 2 x 19 265 9 223 7 242 1 255 8 205 7 190 5 203 7 465 1 228 6 482 6 The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 867 Technical manual ...

Page 874: ... D E A B IEC04000448 V3 EN US Figure 413 Case without rear cover G F K H J IEC04000464 3 en vsdx IEC04000464 V3 EN US Figure 414 Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 868 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 875: ...Flush mounting dimensions M11571 3 v6 C A IEC04000465 3 en vsd B E D IEC04000465 V3 EN US Figure 415 Flush mounting Case size Tolerance Cut out dimensions mm A 1 B 1 C D 6U 1 2 x 19 210 1 254 3 4 0 10 0 13 5 E 191 1 mm without rear protection cover 231 8 mm with rear protection cover 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 869 Technical manual ...

Page 876: ...ide with RHGS6 xx05000505 vsd B A C G D E F IEC05000505 V1 EN US Figure 417 Panel cut out dimensions for side by side flush mounting Case size mm Tolerance A 1 B 1 C 1 D 1 E 1 F 1 G 1 6U 1 2 x 19 214 0 259 3 240 4 190 5 34 4 13 2 6 4 diam Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 870 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 877: ...ng kit can be used for the 1 2 x 19 case size Only a single case can be mounted in each cut out on the cubicle panel for class IP54 protection The screws from the IED shall be used to fasten the fasteners to the IED Flush mounting cannot be used for side by side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side by side in one 1 cut out 1MRK...

Page 878: ...rip used to obtain IP54 class The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate 2 Fastener 2 3 Groove 4 Screw 4 M3x8 mm 5 Joining point of sealing strip 6 Panel 20 4 2 19 panel rack mounting IP10313 1 v1 20 4 2 1 Overview SEMOD127656 5 v4 The IED can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using a mounting kit consisting of two mounting angles and their fastening screws Sec...

Page 879: ...9 Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the IED 20 4 2 2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting M11948 2 v6 IEC04000452 3 en vsd 1b 1a 2 3 IEC04000452 V3 EN US Figure 420 19 panel rack mounting details The required torque for the screws is 3 5 Nm 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20...

Page 880: ...l a panel or in a cubicle Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the IED If fiber cables are bent too much the signal can be weakened Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber connection Section 20 1MRK 506 382 UEN A IED hardware 874 Line dis...

Page 881: ...rresponding 4 Mounting bar 2 5 Screw 6 M5x8 6 Side plate 2 20 4 3 3 How to reach the rear side of the IED M11941 2 v5 The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this type of mounting See figure 422 To reach the rear side of the IED a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged side 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protection REL650 ...

Page 882: ...1 2 x 19 and RHGS cases can be mounted side by side up to a maximum size of 19 For side by side rack mounting the side by side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separately Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the angles on the IED Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside t...

Page 883: ...late 2 2 3 Screw 16 M4x6 4 Mounting angle 2 5 Washer 16 M4x6 20 4 4 3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case M11953 3 v4 A 1 2 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case 6 or 12 The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24 It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of for example a DC switch or two auxiliary relays 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED har...

Page 884: ...k mounting kit must be used The mounting kit has to be ordered separately The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19 With side by side flush mounting installation only IP class 20 is obtained To reach IP class 54 it is required to mount the IEDs separately For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs see section Flush mounting Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting th...

Page 885: ...ws is 3 5 Nm PosNo Description Quantity Type 1 Mounting plate 2 2 3 Screw washer 16 M4x6 4 Mounting angle 2 20 5 Technical data IP16276 1 v1 20 5 1 Enclosure IP16278 1 v1 M11778 1 v6 Table 659 Case Material Steel sheet Front plate Stainless steel with cut out for HMI Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel Finish Light grey RAL 7035 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 20 IED hardware Line distance protec...

Page 886: ...e pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected 20 5 3 Connection system SEMOD53371 1 v1 SEMOD53376 2 v6 Table 663 CT and VT circuit connectors Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area Screw compression type 250 V AC 20 A 4 mm2 AWG12 2 x 2 5 mm2 2 x AWG14 Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC 20...

Page 887: ...fluence Ripple in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range max 2 Full wave rectified 15 of EL 0 01 Auxiliary voltage dependence operate value 20 of EL 0 01 Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24 60 V DC 20 100 250 V DC 20 Interruption interval 0 50 ms No restart 0 s Correct behaviour at power down Restart time 300 s Table 668 Frequency influence reference standard IEC 60255 1 Dependence on Within nominal...

Page 888: ...equency immunity test 150 300 V 50 Hz IEC 60255 26 Zone A Conducted common mode immunity test 15 Hz 150 kHz IEC 61000 4 16 Class IV Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A m 3 s 100 A m cont IEC 61000 4 8 Class V Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A m IEC 61000 4 9 Class V Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A m IEC 61000 4 10 Class V Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V ...

Page 889: ...60068 2 78 Damp heat test cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at 25 to 55 C and humidity 93 to 95 1 cycle 24 hours IEC 60068 2 30 Table 672 CE compliance Test According to Immunity EN 60255 26 Emissivity EN 60255 26 Low voltage directive EN 60255 27 Table 673 Mechanical tests Test Type test values Reference standards Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255 21 1 Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 6025...

Page 890: ...884 ...

Page 891: ...g code 2 Power supply module PSM 3 Ordering and serial number 4 Manufacturer 5 Transformer designations 6 Transformer input module rated currents and voltages 7 Optional customer specific information 8 Order number dc supply voltage and rated frequency 9 Product type description and serial number 10 Product type 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 21 Labels Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 885 Techn...

Page 892: ...73 V2 EN US 1 Warning label 2 Caution label 3 Class 1 laser product label It is used when an optical SFP or an MR LDCM is configured in the product IEC06000575 V1 EN US Section 21 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Labels 886 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 893: ...rom http www abb com protection control Connection diagrams for Configured products Connection diagram REL650 2 2 A11X00 1MRK006507 LA Connection diagram REL650 2 2 A12X00 1MRK006507 LB Connection diagrams for Customized products Connection diagram 650 series 2 2 IEC 1MRK006501 AG Connection diagram 650 series 2 2 ANSI 1MRK006502 AG 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 22 Connection diagrams Line distance p...

Page 894: ...888 ...

Page 895: ...s current dependent time characteristics are used Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections operating in series xx05000129 vsd I I I IEC05000129 V1 EN US Figure 427 Three overcurrent protections operating in series en05000130 vsd Time Fault point position Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1 IEC05000130 V1 EN US Figure 428 Definite time overc...

Page 896: ...gin between the operation time of the protections This required time margin is dependent of following factors in a simple case with two protections in series Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset times of the protections Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections Assume we have the f...

Page 897: ... trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted The breaker time t2 t1 can differ between different faults The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active At time t3 the protection A1 is reset that is the timer is stopped In ...

Page 898: ...istics for reset delay can also be chosen If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value here internal signal startValue a timer according to the selected operating mode is started The component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations In case of definite time lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is rea...

Page 899: ...ö ç ç è ø è ø å p n j i j t C A k in EQUATION1192 V1 EN US Equation 97 where j 1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected that is when 1 i in EQUATION1193 V1 EN US Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled that is when a trip is given...

Page 900: ... the selected setting value for time multiplier k In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics there are also two additional inverse curves available the RI curve and the RD curve The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI The curve is described by equation 98 0 339 0 235 æ ö ç ç ç è ø k t s in i EQUATION1194 V1 EN US Equation 98 wh...

Page 901: ...UATION1196 V1 EN US Equation 100 Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled There is the possibility to choose between three different reset time lags Instantaneous Reset IEC Reset ANSI Reset If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be rese...

Page 902: ...programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available instantaneous IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time If the current dependent type is used settings pr tr and cr must be given see equation 102 r pr t t s k i cr in æ ö ç ç ç æ ö ç ç è ø è ø EQUATION1198 V2 EN US Equation 102 For RI and RD inverse time delay characteri...

Page 903: ...37 112 2 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A 28 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 tr 13 46 ANSI Long Time Inverse A 0 0...

Page 904: ...QUATION1253 SMALL V1 EN US I Imeasured Iset k 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 PR 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 Table 676 RI and RD type inverse time characteristics Function Range or value Accuracy RI type inverse charac...

Page 905: ... Iset I 20 x Iset ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 160 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0 0086 B 0 0185 P 0 02 tr 0 46 ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0 0515 B 0 1140 P 0 02 tr 4 85 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A 64 07 B 0 250 P 2 0 tr 30 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A 28 55 B 0 712 P 2 0 tr 13 4...

Page 906: ... A 120 P 1 0 Programmable characteristic Operate characteristic æ ö ç ç è ø P A t B k I C EQUATION1370 SMALL V1 EN US Reset characteristic PR TR t k I CR EQUATION1253 SMALL V1 EN US I Imeasured Iset k 0 05 999 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 00 20 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 1 10 0 in steps of 0 1 P 0 005 3 000 in steps of 0 001 TR 0 005 100 000 in steps of 0 001 CR 0 1 10 0 in ...

Page 907: ...nt protection Function Range or value Accuracy Operating characteristic 1 P A t B k tDef I æ ö ç ç ç è ø EQUATION1249 SMALL V2 EN US Reset characteristic 2 1 tr t k I EQUATION1250 SMALL V1 EN US I Imeasured Iset 0 10 k 3 00 ANSI IEEE C37 112 5 0 or 40 ms whichever is greater ANSI Extremely Inverse A 28 2 B 0 1217 P 2 0 tr 29 1 ANSI Very inverse A 19 61 B 0 491 P 2 0 tr 21 6 ANSI Normal Inverse A 0...

Page 908: ...tion Range or value Accuracy Type A curve æ ö ç è ø t k U U U EQUATION1436 SMALL V1 EN US U Uset U Umeasured k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 5 0 or 45 ms whichever is greater Type B curve 2 0 480 0 035 32 0 5 n n k t U U U IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN US k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 0 035 32 0 5 n k t U U U æ ö ç è ø IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN US k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable cur...

Page 909: ...EQUATION1432 SMALL V1 EN US U Uset U Umeasured k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve é ù ê ú ê ú ê ú æ ö ê ú ç ëè ø û P k A t D U U B C U EQUATION1433 SMALL V1 EN US U Uset U Umeasured k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in steps of 0 001 1MRK 506 382 UEN A S...

Page 910: ... EN US k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Type C curve 3 0 480 32 0 5 0 035 t k U U U EQUATION1438 SMALL V2 EN US k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 Programmable curve æ ö ç è ø P k A t D U U B C U EQUATION1439 SMALL V1 EN US k 0 05 1 10 in steps of 0 01 A 0 005 200 000 in steps of 0 001 B 0 50 100 00 in steps of 0 01 C 0 0 1 0 in steps of 0 1 D 0 000 60 000 in steps of 0 001 P 0 000 3 000 in steps of 0 001 S...

Page 911: ...OD118114 4 v4 A070750 V2 EN US Figure 432 ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 905 Technical manual ...

Page 912: ...A070751 V2 EN US Figure 433 ANSI Very inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 906 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 913: ...A070752 V2 EN US Figure 434 ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 907 Technical manual ...

Page 914: ...A070753 V2 EN US Figure 435 ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 908 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 915: ...A070817 V2 EN US Figure 436 ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 909 Technical manual ...

Page 916: ...A070818 V2 EN US Figure 437 ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 910 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 917: ...A070819 V2 EN US Figure 438 ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 911 Technical manual ...

Page 918: ...A070820 V2 EN US Figure 439 IEC Normal inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 912 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 919: ...A070821 V2 EN US Figure 440 IEC Very inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 913 Technical manual ...

Page 920: ...A070822 V2 EN US Figure 441 IEC Inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 914 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 921: ...A070823 V2 EN US Figure 442 IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 915 Technical manual ...

Page 922: ...A070824 V2 EN US Figure 443 IEC Short time inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 916 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 923: ...A070825 V2 EN US Figure 444 IEC Long time inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 917 Technical manual ...

Page 924: ...A070826 V2 EN US Figure 445 RI type inverse time characteristics Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 918 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 925: ...A070827 V2 EN US Figure 446 RD type inverse time characteristics 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 919 Technical manual ...

Page 926: ... 4CBD 8247 C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN US Figure 447 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 920 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 927: ... 4DC7 A84B 174544C09142 V1 EN US Figure 448 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 921 Technical manual ...

Page 928: ... 47F2 AEF9 45FF148CB679 V1 EN US Figure 449 Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 922 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 929: ...40E6 9767 69C1536E3CBC V1 EN US Figure 450 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 23 Inverse time characteristics Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 923 Technical manual ...

Page 930: ...4D9A A7C0 E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN US Figure 451 Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection Section 23 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Inverse time characteristics 924 Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC Technical manual ...

Page 931: ...erican Wire Gauge standard BBP Busbar protection BFOC 2 5 Bayonet fibre optic connector BFP Breaker failure protection BI Binary input BIM Binary input module BOM Binary output module BOS Binary outputs status BR External bistable relay BS British Standards BSR Binary signal transfer function receiver blocks BST Binary signal transfer function transmit blocks C37 94 IEEE ANSI protocol used when se...

Page 932: ...turbance recorder according to IEEE ANSI C37 111 1999 IEC 60255 24 Contra directional Way of transmitting G 703 over a balanced line Involves four twisted pairs two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals COT Cause of transmission CPU Central processing unit CR Carrier receive CRC Cyclic redundancy check CROB Control relay output block CS C...

Page 933: ...performance architecture ESD Electrostatic discharge F SMA Type of optical fibre connector FAN Fault number FCB Flow control bit Frame count bit FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech data and protection signals FOX 512 515 Access multiplexer FOX 6Plus Compact time division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers FP...

Page 934: ...IEC 60870 5 103 Communication standard for protection equipment A serial master slave protocol for point to point communication IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard IEC 61850 8 1 Communication protocol standard IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE 802 12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits s on twisted pair or optical fiber cable IEEE P138...

Page 935: ... the data link layer 2 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 IP 20 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 level 20 IP 40 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 level 40 IP 54 Ingression protection according to IEC 60529 level 54 IRF Internal failure signal IRIG B InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B standard 200 ITU International Telecommunications Union LAN Local...

Page 936: ... PC MIP Mezzanine card standard PMC PCI Mezzanine card POR Permissive overreach POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level that is in near proximity to the measured and or controlled components PRP Parallel redundancy protocol PSM Power supply module PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600 PTP Precision time protocol PT ratio Potential transformer or ...

Page 937: ...ardware clocks in every embedded system in a network Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock providing the required accuracy SOF Status of fault SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition SPA a serial master slave protocol for point to point and ring communication SRY Switch for CB ready condition ST Switch or push button to trip Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator...

Page 938: ...fault applied to the balance point that is the set reach The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it See also Overreach UTC Coordinated Universal Time A coordinated time scale maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures BIPM which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals UTC is derived from International Atomic ...

Page 939: ... as the residual or the earth fault current 3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage 1MRK 506 382 UEN A Section 24 Glossary Line distance protection REL650 2 2 IEC 933 Technical manual ...

Page 940: ...934 ...

Page 941: ...935 ...

Page 942: ... AB Grid Automation Products 721 59 Västerås Sweden Phone 46 0 21 32 50 00 abb com protection control Copyright 2017 ABB All rights reserved Specifications subject to change without notice 1MRK 506 382 UEN ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for RELION 650 SERIES

Brand: GE Pages: 32

Brand: ETI Pages: 2

Brand: TERASAKI Pages: 110

Brand: LOVATO ELECTRIC Pages: 4

Brand: Siemens Pages: 12

3VA25-JP Series

Brand: Siemens Pages: 15

Brand: Siemens Pages: 18

3VA52-EC.1 Series

Brand: Siemens Pages: 12

Brand: ABB Pages: 76

P3-30/EA/SVB-SW-MCS

Brand: Eaton Pages: 2

Brand: Eaton Pages: 4

Digitrip OPTIM 1050

Brand: Cutler-Hammer Pages: 66

Brand: Wetekom Pages: 12

Brand: Moeller Pages: 2

Allen-Bradley 140M-C-TRE

Brand: Rockwell Automation Pages: 2

Allen-Bradley 140G-G

Brand: Rockwell Automation Pages: 3

1492-GS1 Series

Brand: Rockwell Automation Pages: 2

Allen-Bradley 140U

Brand: Rockwell Automation Pages: 16

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands